Active Servo
Technology
EJECT
DOLBY B NR
EJECT
Active Servo
Technology
Active Servo
Technology
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
UPDOWN
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNINGBAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
1
2
3
OPEN/CLOSE
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
7
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
DISC CHANGE
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
UPDOWN
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNINGBAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
1
2
3
OPEN/CLOSE
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
EJECT
DOLBY B NR
EJECT
Active Servo
Technology
Active Servo
Technology
Active Servo
Technology
OWNER‘S MANUAL
MODE D‘EMPLOI
Natural Sound Mini Component System
Chaîne Mini de la série “Natural Sound”
22
1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating
instructions should be read before the unit is operated.
2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions
should be retained for future reference.
3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the unit and in the
operating instructions should be adhered to.
4 Follow Instructions – All operating and other instructions
should be followed.
5 Water and Moisture – The unit should not be used near
water – for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen
sink, laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming
pool, etc.
6 Carts and Stands – The unit should be used only with a
cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer.
6A A unit and cart combination should be
moved with care. Quick stops,
excessive force, and uneven surfaces
may cause the unit and
cart combination to overturn.
7 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to
a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the
manufacturer.
8 Ventilation – The unit should be situated so that its
location or position does not interfere with its proper
ventilation. For example, the unit should not be situated
on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface, that may block the
ventilation openings; or placed in a built-in installation,
such as a bookcase or cabinet that may impede the flow
of air through the ventilation openings.
9 Heat – The unit should be situated away from heat
sources such as radiators, stoves, or other appliances
that produce heat.
10 Power Sources – The unit should be connected to a
power supply only of the type described in the operating
instructions or as marked on the unit.
11 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be
routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or
pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying
particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience
receptacles, and the point where they exit from the unit.
12 Cleaning – The unit should be cleaned only as
recommended by the manufacturer.
13 Nonuse Periods – The power cord of the unit should be
unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long
period of time.
14 Object and Liquid Entry – Care should be taken so that
objects do not fall into and liquids are not spilled into the
inside of the unit.
15 Damage Requiring Service – The unit should be serviced
by qualified service personnel when:
A. The power-supply cord or the plug has been
damaged; or
B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the
unit; or
C. The unit has been exposed to rain; or
D. The unit does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance; or
E. The unit has been dropped, or the cabinet damaged.
16 Servicing – The user should not attempt to service the unit
beyond those means described in the operating
instructions. All other servicing should be referred to
qualified service personnel.
17 Power Lines – An outdoor antenna should be located
away from power lines.
18 Grounding or Polarization – Precautions should be taken
so that the grounding or polarization is not defeated.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead
symbol, within an equilateral triangle,
is intended to alert you to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous
voltage” within the product’s
enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of
electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an
equilateral triangle is intended to alert
you to the presence of important
operating and maintenance
(servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the
appliance.
•
Explanation of Graphical Symbols
CAUTION
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS
UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
33
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the
instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by
Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to
use the product.
2. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to
accessories and/or another product use only high quality
shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product
MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions.
Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC
authorization to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to
comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations,
Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with
these requirements provides a reasonable level of
assurance that your use of this product in a residential
environment will not result in harmful interference with
other electronic devices.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if
not installed and used according to the instructions
found in the users manual, may cause interference
harmful to the operation of other electronic devices.
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that
interference will not occur in all installations. If this product
is found to be the source of interference, which can be
determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try
to eliminate the problem by using one of the following
measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the
antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,
change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to
distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the
appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics
Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA
90620.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its
subsidiaries.
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that
provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only)
SPECIAL NOTES FOR FCC COMPOSITE
DEVICE (for US customers only)
This device is a composite system. The digital device
component may not cause harmful interference.
19 For US customers only:
Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna is
connected to this unit, be sure the antenna system is
grounded so as to provide some protection against
voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of
the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides
information with regard to proper grounding of the mast
and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to
an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,
location of antenna discharge unit, connection to
grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding
electrode.
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
MAST
GROUND
CLAMP
ANTENNA
LEAD IN
WIRE
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810–20)
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810–21)
GROUND CLAMPS
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250. PART H)
ELECTRIC
SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s
Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of
your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the
sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring
or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your
sensitive hearing.
Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often
undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the
Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer
Electronics Group recommend you to avoid
prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime (for US customers only)
44
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
●
After unpacking, check that the following parts are contained.
ACCESSOIRES FOURNIS
●
Après le déballage, vérifier que les pièces suivantes sont incluses.
●
Remote control transmitter
●
Télécommande
●
Batteries (size AA, UM/SUM-3, R6, HP-7)
●
Piles (format AA, UM/SUM-3, R6, HP-7)
●
AM (MW/LW) loop antenna
●
Cadre-antenne AM (PO/GO)
●
Indoor FM antenna
●
Antenne intérieure FM
●
Speaker cords
●
Câbles d’enceintes
●
Pads
●
Patins
●
Screws
●
Vis
●
Mounting brackets
●
Supports de montage
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
55
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
Active Servo
Technology
MIN MAX
MIC MIC MIXING
2
6
1
4
3
7
8
9 A C0 D E F GB
H I
K
J
L
M
N
O
P
5
F
=
C
896754
3
21
MHz
PRESET
USER
NOR TEST
PHANTOM
TIMER
TAPE 1
SLEEP
STEREO
TUNED MEMORY
AUTO PTY HOLD
PROGRAMMUSIC
ROCK BLUES
RAP JAZZ
PRO LOGIC HALL ARENA
1 2
3 4
100 350 1K 3.5K 10K
VOLUME
ED
3 STEREO
AB
P
R
E
S
E
T
/
T
U
N
I
N
G
/
B
A
N
D
1
Illustration: Europe model
Illustration: Modèle pour l’Europe
66
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
UP
Q
R
VST U
W
X
Y
Z
INPUT INPUT
L
H
J
G
TRACK
TOTAL REM
USER
TAPE 1
RANDOM
PROGRAMMUSIC
EDIT
ROCK
ARENA
100 350 1K 3.5K 10K
PROG
S F REP
VOLUME
OVER 15
1234
78910
13 14 15
5
11
6
12
AB
MNO PQ
I
K
2
Illustration: Europe model
Illustration: Modèle pour l’Europe
77
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
UP
INPUT INPUT
[
\
]
^abcde
h
g
f
Y
X
STU
VW
R
USER
REC
TAPE 1 2
DUBBING
NOR HIGH
PROGRAMMUSIC
ROCK
ARENA
100 350 1K 3.5K 10K
VOLUME
OVER 15
1234
78910
13 14 15
5
11
6
12
B
3
Illustration: Europe model
Illustration: Modèle pour l’Europe
88
Active Servo
Technology
Active Servo
Technology
4
ij
Front speakers
Enceintes avant
NX-GX70
Center speaker
Enceinte centrale
NX-C70
Rear speakers
Enceintes arrière
NX-E70
j
99
TAPE
STOP PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
Y
T
UVWX
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
S
R
H
G
I
J
Q
KL M N O P
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
F
E
D
C
B
A
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
5
1
3
2
6
Active Servo
Technology
Active Servo
Technology
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
P
R
E
S
E
T
/T
U
N
IN
G
/B
A
N
D
A
/B
/C
/D
/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
S
T
A
R
T
MODE
F
R
E
Q
P
S
/P
T
Y
/R
T
/C
T
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
0.2 m – 6 m
(8” – 20’)
30°
30°
7
FRONT
SPEAKERS
DO NOT CONNECT THIS UNIT TO SPEAKERS OTHER
THAN NX-C70 (CENTER) OR NX-E70 (REAR).
RL
R L
RL
SINCE THIS UNIT
HAS AN ACTIVE
SERVO CIRCUIT
BUILT–IN.
DO NOT CONNECT
IT TO SPEAKERS
OTHER THAN
NX–GX70.
REAR CENTER REAR
SPEAKERS
CENTER/REAR
OUT
IN
VCR
LD/TV
OUT
MD/AUX
IN
AUDIO SIGNAL
OUT
SUBWOOFER VIDEO SIGNAL
MONITOR
OUT
L
R
R
L
POWER HIGH CUT VOLUME
140 Hz
010
40 Hz
1100
8
Rear speakers
Enceintes arrière
Center speaker
Enceinte centrale
Subwoofer system
Subwoofer de Traitement
Front speakers
Enceintes avant
ANTENNA
FRONT
SPEAKERS
DO NOT CONNECT THIS UNIT TO SPEAKERS OTHER
THAN NX-C70 (CENTER) OR NX-E70 (REAR).
RL
R L
RL
SINCE THIS UNIT
HAS AN ACTIVE
SERVO CIRCUIT
BUILT–IN.
DO NOT CONNECT
IT TO SPEAKERS
OTHER THAN
NX–GX70.
75Ω UNBAL.
REAR CENTER REAR
FM GND AM
CENTER MODE
NORMAL
PHANTOM
SPEAKERS
CENTER/REAR
OUT
IN
VCR
LD/TV
OUT
MD/AUX
IN
AUDIO SIGNAL
OUT
SUBWOOFER VIDEO SIGNAL
MONITOR
OUT
RL
OUT
IN
VCR
LD/TV
OUT
MD/AUX
IN
AUDIO SIGNAL
OUT
SUBWOOFER VIDEO SIGNAL
MONITOR
OUT
VIDEO IN
VIDEO IN
AUDIO IN
VIDEO OUT
AUDIO OUT
LINE OUT
LINE IN
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO OUT
1111
9
LD player etc.
Lecteur de disque laser, etc.
Monitor TV
Moniteur TV
DAT, MD recorder, etc.
Enregistreur de DAT, MD, etc
Video cassette recorder
Magnétoscope
1122
ANTENNA
FRONT
SPEAKERS
DO NOT CONNECT THIS UNIT TO SPEAKERS OTHER
THAN NX-C70 (CENTER) OR NX-E70 (REAR).
RL
R L
RL
SINCE THIS UNIT
HAS AN ACTIVE
SERVO CIRCUIT
BUILT–IN.
DO NOT CONNECT
IT TO SPEAKERS
OTHER THAN
NX–GX70.
75Ω UNBAL.
REAR CENTER REAR
FM GND AM
CENTER MODE
NORMAL
PHANTOM
SPEAKERS
CENTER/REAR
OUT
IN
VCR
LD/TV
OUT
MD/AUX
IN
AUDIO SIGNAL
OUT
SUBWOOFER VIDEO SIGNAL
MONITOR
OUT
@
DISPLAY
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
HOUR
MIN
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
1
2
3
Changes.
Change
verändert sich
Ändras
Cambia
Cambia
Verandert.
Changes.
Change
verändert sich
Ändras
Cambia
Cambia
Verandert.
D
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
TAPE
STOP PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
C
To AC outlet
Vers la prise c.a.
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
PHONES
B
A
E-1
English
ENGLISH
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
Page
PRECAUTIONS..................................................................2-3
FEATURES.........................................................................4-5
NAMES OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS....................6-7
REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER...............................7-8
SETTING UP THE MAIN UNIT..............................................8
SETTING UP THE SPEAKERS........................................9-11
CONNECTIONS..............................................................11-13
REMOVING THE FRONT GRILLES OF FRONT
SPEAKERS..........................................................................13
LISTENING WITH HEADPHONES......................................13
TURNING THE POWER ON/OFF TO THIS SYSTEM.........13
SETTING THE CLOCK........................................................14
ADJUSTING BRIGHTNESS OF THE DISPLAY.................14
VOLUME CONTROL...........................................................14
SPEAKER BALANCE ADJUSTMENT...........................15-16
COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION ......................17-23
TUNING OPERATION....................................................24-26
Page
RECEIVING RDS STATIONS
(U.K. and Europe models only)....................................27-30
TAPE DECK OPERATION ............................................31-34
RECORDING COMPACT DISCS...................................35-40
OTHER RECORDINGS..................................................41-42
OPERATING EXTERNAL UNITS
CONNECTED WITH THIS SYSTEM ...................................43
USING GRAPHIC EQUALIZER .....................................44-45
USING SOUND FIELD PROCESSOR ...........................46-49
STORING YOUR OWN PROGRAMS..................................50
KARAOKE OPERATION (Australia, China, Singapore
and General models only) .................................................51
HOW TO USE THE BUILT-IN TIMER............................52-55
MAINTENANCE...................................................................56
TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................56-57
SPECIFICATIONS..........................................................58-59
Thank you for purchasing this YAMAHA product. We hope it will give you many years of trouble-free enjoyment. For the best
performance, read this manual carefully. It will guide you in operating your YAMAHA product.
For basic source play, the following illustrations on top of
pages will help you to look for the section you need.
......CD playback ......Tuning
......Tape playback/recording
E-2
PRECAUTIONS: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT
■ Although the cassette deck’s record/playback heads
used in this unit are high quality heads with
outstanding reproduction characteristics, they can
become dirty through the use of old tapes or from
dust accumulation over time. This can have a
serious effect on reproduction quality. Clean the
heads regularly with one of the commonly available
head cleaners or with cleaning solutions.
■ The voltage to be used must be the same as that
specified on this unit. Using this unit with a higher
voltage than that which is specified is dangerous and
may result in a fire or other type of accident causing
damage. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for
any damage resulting from use of this unit with a
voltage other than that which is specified.
■ The sound level at a given volume setting depends
on speaker location and other factors. Care should
be taken to avoid exposure to sudden high levels of
sound, which may occur when turning on the unit
with the volume control setting at high, and to
continuous high levels of sound.
■ Sudden temperature changes and storage or
operation in an extremely humid environment may
cause condensation inside the cabinet.
Condensation can cause the unit to malfunction.
To eliminate condensation:
•
CD pickup
Leave the power on with no disc in the unit until
normal playback is possible (about 1 hour).
•
Tape head
Leave the power on with no tape in the unit until
normal playback is possible (about 1 hour).
Note
If condensation forms on the tape head, foreign
matter may accumulate during use.
•
Remote control
Wipe off condensation on the transmitter window
with a soft cloth before operating the unit.
■ This system is designed for using the provided
Active Servo Processing Speaker System for front
speakers. Therefore, do not attempt to connect
other conventional speakers to the FRONT
SPEAKERS terminals of this system.
■ Choose the installation location of this unit carefully.
Avoid placing it in direct sunlight or close to a source
of heat. Also avoid locations subject to vibration and
excessive dust, heat, cold or moisture. Keep it away
from sources of hum such as transformers and
electric motors.
■ Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may
overheat, possibly causing damage.
■ Never open the cabinet. If something drops into the
set, contact your dealer.
■ Always set the VOLUME control to minimum before
starting an audio source play: increase the volume
gradually to an appropriate level after play has
started.
■ Do not use force on switches, controls or connection
wires. When moving the unit, first disconnect the
power plug and the wires connected to other
equipment. Never pull the wire itself.
■ Do not attempt to clean the unit with chemical
solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean,
dry cloth.
■ Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section
regarding common operating errors before
concluding that the unit is faulty.
■ To prevent lightning damage, disconnect the AC
power plug and the antenna cable when there is an
electrical storm.
■ Do not plug the AC power plug to the wall socket
before you finish all connections.
■ Never allow metallic items (e.g. screwdrivers, tools,
etc.) to come near the cassette deck’s
record/playback head assembly in this unit. Doing so
may not only scratch or damage the head’s mirror-
smooth finish, it may change the magnetic
characteristics of the heads, causing a deterioration
in reproduction performance quality.
E-3
English
NOTE
Please check the copyright laws in your country to
record from records, compact discs, radio, etc.
Recording of copyright material may infringe
copyright laws.
IMPORTANT
Please record the serial number of this unit in the
space below.
Serial No.:
The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.
Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future
reference.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO
RAIN OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION (FOR CANADA MODEL)
TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE
BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT AND FULLY
INSERT.
FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMER
THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS MEETS ALL
REQUIREMENTS OF THE CANADIAN
INTERFERENCE-CAUSING EQUIPMENT
REGULATIONS.
CAUTION FOR CARRYING THIS UNIT
Be sure not to carry or tip this unit with discs
remaining in it.
CAUTION FOR MOVING THIS UNIT
Before moving this unit, first remove all discs from
the disc table and close the table by pressing the
OPEN/CLOSE button. After you confirm that “NO
DISC” lights up on the display, switch off the power
by pressing the POWER switch, and then disconnect
the power plug from the AC outlet.
PRECAUTIONS: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT
The apparatus is not disconnected from the AC
power source as long as it is connected to the wall
outlet, even if the apparatus itself is turned off.
CAUTION
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may
result in hazardous radiation exposure.
DANGER
Invisible laser radiation when open and interlock
failed or defeated.
Avoid direct exposure to beam.
WARNING
As the laser beam used in this unit is harmful to the
eyes, do not attempt to disassemble the cabinet. Refer
servicing to qualified personnel only.
To avoid electrical shock, do not open the cabinet.
Refer servicing to qualified personnel only.
DANGER: The use of optical instrument with this
product will increase eye hazard.
Laser Diode Properties
•
Material: GaAlAs
•
Wavelength: 780nm
•
Emission Duration: continuous
•
Laser Output: max. 44.6µW*
* This output is the value measured at a distance of
about 200mm from the objective lens surface on
the Optical Pick-up Block.
E-4
FEATURES
The System
● 5 Speaker Multi-Channel Audio
System Including Two Front
Speakers, One Center Speaker and
Two Rear Speakers
● Active Servo Processing Front
Speaker System
(NX-GX70)
● Free-Standing/Wall Mounting Type
Rear Speaker System (NX-E70)
● Remote Control Capability
Amplifier
● Minimum RMS Output Power per
Channel
Front L, R: 65W + 65W (6Ω) RMS
Output
Power, 1% THD,
1 kHz
Center
: 20W (6Ω) RMS Output
Power, 1% THD, 1 kHz
Rear: 20W (6Ω) RMS Output
Power, 1% THD, 1 kHz
● Adjustable Display Brightness
● 2 Microphone Jacks and Mic Mixing
Level Control for Karaoke (Australia,
China, Singapore and General Models
Only)
● Multi-Use Timer/Sleep Timer
● Automatic Power-Off Function
● 4 External Audio/Video Component
Connecting Capability
● SUBWOOFER Output Terminal Which
Passes Low Frequencies Only
Compact Disc Player
● 3-Disc Carousel Type CD Changer
● CD Window to Make CD Playback
Visible from Outside
● PLAYXCHANGE; Disc Changing
Capability while Playing Back
Another
● 20-Track Random Access
Programmable CD Playback
● Single Track/Entire Disc/All Disc
Repeat Play
● Random-sequence Play
● Automatic Synchronized Recording
with CD Playback
● Automatic CD Editing Function for
Recording to Tape
Tape Deck
● Double Cassette Tape Deck with
Automatic Reversing Function
● 2-Speed Tape Dubbing
● Dolby B Type Noise Reduction
System
Tuner
● 40 Station Random Access Preset
Tuning
● 40 Station Automatic Preset Tuning
● Multi-Functions for RDS Broadcast
Reception
(Europe and U.K. models only)
E-5
English
FEATURES
Dolby Pro Logic Surround
This unit employs a Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder similar
to professional Dolby Stereo decoders used in many movie
theaters. By using the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder,
you can experience the dramatic realism and impact of Dolby
Surround movie theater sound in your own home. Dolby Pro
Logic employs a four channel five speaker system. The Pro
Logic Surround system divides the input signal into four
levels: the left and right main channels, the center channel
(used for dialog), and the rear surround sound channels
(used for sound effects, background noise, and other ambient
noises). The center channel allows listeners seated in even
less-than-ideal positions to hear the dialog originating from
the action on the screen while experiencing good stereo
imaging.
Dolby Surround is encoded on the sound track of pre-
recorded video tapes, laser discs, and some TV/cable
broadcasts. When you play a source encoded with Dolby
Surround on this unit, the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder
decodes the signal and distributes the surround-sound
effects.
In addition, this unit features a built-in automatic input balance
control. This always assures you the best performance
without manual adjustment.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation. “Dolby”, the double-D symbol and “Pro
Logic” are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
Sound Field Processor Including
Dolby Pro Logic Surround Decoder
● 2 Programs for Dolby Surround
Decoding (DOLBY PRO LOGIC and
DOLBY 3 STEREO)
2 Programs for Sound Field
Processing (HALL and ARENA)
[3-Karaoke Modes for Australia,
China, Singapore and General Models
Only]
● Automatic Input Balance Control for
Dolby Pro Logic Surround
● 2 Center Channel Modes
(NORMAL/PHANTOM)
● Test Tone Generator for Easier
Speaker Balance Adjustment
Graphic Equalizer
● 5-Band Adjustable Graphic Equalizer
● 4 Preset Graphic Equalizer Modes
Selectable According to the Music
Source (ROCK, BLUES, RAP and
JAZZ)
● 4-Sound Field and 4-Equalizer
Control Mode Storing Capability
E-6
NAMES OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
For amplifier/tuner
(See figure 1 on page 55 at the beginning part of this
manual.)
1 A/B/C/D/E Button
2 PRESET/TUNING/BAND Selector Button
3 Remote Control Sensor
4 PROGRAM Selector Button
5 MUSIC Button
6 Equalizer Control Buttons
(ECHO Buttons)
7 USER Button
8 POWER Switch
9 PHONES Jack
0 User Program MEMORY Button
A AUTO/MAN’L (TIMER) Button
B CD Input Selector Button
C TAPE 1/2 Input Selector Button
D HOUR Button
E MIN Button
F TIMER REC Button
G INPUT Selector Buttons
H MIC (Microphone) Jacks
I MIC MIXING (Microphone Mixing) Level Control
J Tuner MEMORY (TIME ADJUST) Button
K VOLUME Control
L (Down)/ (Up) Buttons
M DISPLAY Button
N PTY SEEK START Button
O PTY SEEK MODE Button
P FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT Selector Button
Display
1 Preset Equalizer Mode Indicator (MUSIC)
2 Sound Field Program Indicator (PROGRAM)
3 User Program Number Indicator
4 Center Channel Mode (NOR/PHANTOM) Indicator
5 TEST Indicator
6 TIMER Set Indicator
7 SLEEP Indicator
8 AUTO Tuning Indicator
9 TUNED Indicator
@ STEREO Indicator
A MEMORY Indicator
B PTY HOLD Indicator
C Volume Level Meter
D Graphic Equalizer Level Indicators
E Preset Number Indicator
F Multi Information Display
(Time, Station Frequency, Volume Level, etc.)
For CD player
(See figure 2 on page 66 at the beginning part of this
manual.)
Q DISC Selector Buttons
R Disc Table
S Stop Button:
T Play/Pause Button: /
U DISC CHANGE Button
V OPEN/CLOSE Button:
W RANDOM Button
X REPEAT Button
Y EDIT Button
Z Skip Buttons: /
(Search Buttons: / )
Display
G RANDOM Play Indicator
H Music Calendar Indicator
I Music Calendar OVER 15 Indicator
J Disc Indicator
K Track Number Indicator
L Time Display
M Play Indicator:
N EDIT Indicator
O Tape Side Indicator
P (S, F) REPEAT Indicator
Q Program (PROG) Play Indicator
*
1
*
2
*
2
*
1
: Provided for Australia, China, Singapore and General Models Only
*
2
: Provided for U.K. and Europe Models Only
*
1
E-7
English
For Tape deck
(See figure 3 on page 77 at the beginning part of this
manual.)
[ Reverse MODE Selector Button
\ DOLBY NR Button
] Deck 1 Cassette Compartment
^ Deck 1 EJECT Button
a Fast Wind Button:
b Stop Button:
c Play Button:
d Fast Wind Button:
e Deck 2 EJECT Button
f Deck 2 Cassette Compartment
g DUBBING (NORMAL/HIGH) Buttons
h REC/PAUSE Button
Display
R DUBBING (NOR/HIGH) Indicator
S Reverse Mode Indicator
T Recording (REC) Indicator
U Tape Number Indicator
V Play Direction Indicator
W Dolby ( ) B NR Indicator
X Tape Number Indicator
Y Tape Counter
Speakers (Front/Center/Rear)
(See figure 4 on page 88 at the beginning part of this
manual.)
i YST Port
j Speaker Terminals
NAMES OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
Names of control buttons
(See figure 5 on page 99 at the beginning part of this
manual.)
■
Amplifier/tuner control buttons
1 Remote Control Transmitter Window
2 Preset Station Number Buttons
3 A, B, C, D, E Selector Buttons
4 TEST Button
5 CENTER/REAR/DELAY Selector Button
6 LEVEL Control Buttons
7 SLEEP Button
8 POWER Switch
9 VOLUME – (Down)/+ (Up) Buttons
@ INPUT Selector Button
A USER Button
B PROGRAM Button
C MUSIC Button
D FLAT Button
E TUNER Input Selector Button
F PRESET Number (Down)/ (Up) Buttons
■ CD player control buttons
G Track Number Input Buttons
H TIME Button
I PROGRAM Button
J Disc Play MODE Selector Button
K DISC SKIP Button
L REPEAT Button
M Skip Buttons: /
(Search Buttons: / )
N RANDOM Button
O STOP Button:
P OPEN/CLOSE Button:
Q PLAY/PAUSE Button:
R EDIT Button
S TAPE Button
■
Tape deck control buttons
T REC/PAUSE Button
U TAPE 1/2 Button
V Play Button:
W Stop Button:
X Play Button:
Y Fast Wind Buttons: /
REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER
E-8
Loading the batteries for the
remote control transmitter
(See figure 6 on page 99.)
1 Remove the battery compartment cover.
(Slide the cover in the direction of the arrow.)
2 Insert 2 “AA” size batteries (UM/SUM-3, R6, HP-7 or
equivalent) into the battery compartment.
* Installing the batteries improperly may cause failure.
3 Replace the battery compartment cover.
Precautions for battery use
•
Insert the batteries according to the direction indicated in
the battery compartment.
•
Replace all batteries with new ones at the same time.
•
Remove the batteries if they are weak or if the unit is not
in use for long periods.
•
Don’t mix normal batteries with rechargeable batteries.
Proper use of the remote control
transmitter
(See figure 7 on page 99.)
Aim (within the range of 60° with no obstacles) the remote
control transmitter at the remote control sensor and operate
as shown.
Notes concerning use
•
Replace the batteries if control distance decreases or
operation becomes unstable.
•
Periodically clean the transmitter window on the remote
control transmitter and the sensor on the main unit with a
soft cloth.
•
Exposing the sensor on the main unit to strong light
(especially an inverter type of fluorescent lamp etc.) may
interfere with operation. In this case, reposition the main
unit to avoid direct lighting.
•
Keep the remote control transmitter away from moisture,
excessive heat, shock and vibrations.
•
The remote control transmitter’s usable range is within
0.2m (8”) and 6m (20’) away from the sensor.
REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER
SETTING UP THE MAIN UNIT
1 cm 1 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
Setup examples
Place the main unit as illustrated on the left and allow spaces
more than indicated around the main unit and more than 10
cm (3-15/16”) behind the main unit to assure good
ventilation. Be sure not to place another unit or any object on
top of the main unit to prevent the ventilation holes on the top
panel of the main unit from being obstructed. Otherwise, it
may cause fire or damage to the main unit.
Notes
•
When placing the front speakers apart from the main unit,
allow a space of at least 10 cm (3-15/16”) above, behind
and on the both sides of the main unit.
•
If the main unit is put in a rack, the front of it must be fully
opened.
•
Disconnect the AC supply lead from the AC outlet before
connecting or disconnecting any component.
Main unit
E-9
English
SETTING UP THE SPEAKERS
This system is designed to provide the best sound-field quality with a 5 speaker configuration: front speakers, rear speakers and a
center speaker. You may omit the center speaker, if for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker. (Refer to the “4-
Speaker Configuration” shown below.)
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus the effect sounds. The rear speakers are used for the effect and
surround sounds, and the center speaker is for the center sounds (dialog etc.).
(1)
(2)
Rear L
Rear R
A
c
t
iv
e
S
e
r
v
o
Tech
n
ology
A
c
t
i
v
e
S
e
r
v
o
Tec
hn
ology
Speaker configuration
(1)5-Speaker Configuration
This configuration is the most effective and recommended
one. In this configuration, the center speaker is
necessary as well as the rear speakers. If the sound field
program DOLBY PRO LOGIC or DOLBY 3 STEREO is
selected, conversations will be output from the center
speaker and the ambience will be excellent.
● Set the center channel mode to the “NORMAL”
position. (For details, refer to page 15.)
(2)4-Speaker Configuration
The center speaker is not used in this configuration. If the
sound field program DOLBY PRO LOGIC is selected, the
center sound is output from the left and the right front
speakers, although the program DOLBY 3 STEREO is
useless in this configuration. However, the sound effect
of other programs can be the same as that of the 5-
speaker configuration.
● Be sure to set the center channel mode to the
“PHANTOM” position. (For details, refer to page 15.)
Note
Be sure to use two rear speakers. If you connect one rear
speaker only, sound will not be output from the rear speaker.
Speaker placement
Front speakers: In normal position.
Rear speakers: Behind your listening position, facing
slightly inward. Nearly six feet (approx.
1.8 m) up from the floor.
Center speaker: Precisely between the front speakers.
Rear L
TV set
Rear R
Front L Center Front R
Dialogue
Surround sound
Dialogue
Surround sound
Rear L
Rear R
Front L Front R
Dialogue
Surround sound
Dialogue
Surround sound
Rear L Rear R
Front L
Front R
Center
E-10
■ Mounting the rear speakers
Mount the rear speakers on a shelf, rack or on the floor
directly, or hang them on the wall.
To mount the rear speakers on a wall
1 Attach the provided mounting bracket to the rear of the
speaker by using the provided screws.
2 Fasten screws into a firm wall or wall support as shown in
the diagram, and hang the holes of the mounting bracket
on the protruding screws.
* The holes are arranged so that the speakers can be
mounted in a side long, upright or upside-down way.
* Make sure that the screws are caught by a narrow part
of the holes securely.
Notes
●
Never attach the bracket to the speaker conversely.
●
Speaker cords should be connected to the speaker’s
terminals after the bracket has attached to the speaker to
prevent the speaker cords pressed between the speaker
and the bracket.
SETTING UP THE SPEAKERS
WARNING:
● Each speaker weighs 0.8 kg (1 lbs. 12 oz.). Do not
mount them on thin plywood or soft wall surface
material, as the screws may come out of the flimsy
surface, causing the speakers to fall down and be
damaged, or result in personal injury.
● Do not fasten the speakers to wall with nails,
adhesives, or other unsound hardware. Long-term use
and vibrations may cause them to fall down.
● To avoid accidents resulting from tripping over loose
speaker cables, fix them to the wall.
To hang in a side long way
Hang the speakers so that each of them faces inside as
figured left.
40mm
1
2
Good No good
Tapping screw
(Available at the
hardware store)
Wall/
wall support
E-11
English
■ Mounting the center speaker
Place the speaker on top of the TV or on the floor under the
TV or inside the TV rack so that it is stabilized.
When placing the speaker on top of the TV, to prevent the
speaker from falling down, put the provided pads at four
points on bottom of the speaker.
Notes
• Do not place the speaker on top of the TV whose area
is smaller than the bottom area of the speaker. If
placed, the speaker may drop out causing an injury to
you.
• Though this speaker is a magnetic shielding type, there
may be some influence on a TV picture depending on
the type of TV or the placement of the speaker. In such
a case, place the speaker apart from the TV so that
there is no influence on TV picture.
SETTING UP THE SPEAKERS
Connecting speakers
(See figure 8 on page 1100.)
CONNECTIONS
Connect the provided speakers to the SPEAKERS terminals
on the rear of the main unit.
Connect the front speakers (NX-GX70) to the FRONT
SPEAKERS terminals, the center speaker (NX-C70) to the
CENTER SPEAKERS terminals and the rear speakers (NX-
E70) to the REAR SPEAKERS terminals.
Do not connect speakers other than the designated to the
respective SPEAKERS terminals.
* Use the provided speaker cords for the connections.
Normally, use the short cords to connect with the front
speakers, and use the long ones to connect with the rear
speakers.
How to Connect:
Connect the provided speaker cords to the SPEAKERS
terminals properly as shown below. If the connections are
faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers. Make sure
that the polarity of the speaker wires is correct, that is the +
and – markings are observed. If these wires are reversed,
the sound will be unnatural and lack bass.
As a sure method, connect the wire with a silver line to the +
terminals on both main unit and speaker, and connect the
wire with no line to the – terminals on both of them.
Caution
Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other as
this could damage the amplifier and/or speakers.
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
➀
Press up the tab.
➁
Insert the bare wire.
[Remove approx.
5mm (1/4”) insulation
from the speaker
wires.]
➂
Press down the tab
and secure the wire.
➀
➁
➂
Never plug the AC supply lead of this system into the AC outlet until all connections are
completed.
Note on connecting a subwoofer (separate
purchase)
You may wish to add a subwoofer to reinforce the bass
frequencies.
Connect the SUBWOOFER OUT terminal of the main
unit to the INPUT terminal of the subwoofer amplifier,
and connect the speaker terminals of the subwoofer
amplifier to the subwoofer.
With some subwoofers, including the Yamaha Active
Servo Processing Subwoofer System, the amplifier and
subwoofer are in the same unit.
* The SUBWOOFER OUT terminal is for output to a
monaural amplifier driving a subwoofer. Only frequencies
below 200 Hz from the front and center channels are
output.
Note
To connect the speaker wires from the center speaker
(NX-C70) to the CENTER SPEAKERS terminals on the
main unit, make sure to connect the wire with a silver line
to the + terminal and the wire with no line to the –
terminal.
E-12
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
ANTENNA
R L
75Ω UNBAL.
REAR CENTER REAR
FM GND AM
ANTENNA
75Ω UNBAL.
FM GND AM
ANTENNA
75Ω UNBAL.
FM GND AM
ANTENNA
75Ω UNBAL.
FM GND AM
CENTER MODE
NORMAL
PHANTOM
SPEAKERS
CENTER/REAR
Antenna connection
(1) Supplied FM antenna
Connect the FM antenna wire to the corresponding terminal
and direct the FM antenna wire to the direction where the
strongest signal can be received.
(2) Supplied AM (MW/LW) loop antenna
Connect the AM (MW/LW) loop antenna wires to the
corresponding terminals. Position the AM (MW/LW) loop
antenna for optimum reception. Place the AM (MW/LW) loop
antenna on a shelf etc., or install it on the rack or wall with
screws (not supplied).
Notes
•
When static is still heard even after adjusting the position
of the AM (MW/LW) loop antenna, try reversing the wire
connections (right to left).
•
Do not place the AM (MW/LW) loop antenna on the unit. It
will result in noise generation, since the unit is equipped
with digital electronics. Place the AM (MW/LW) loop
antenna away from the unit.
(3) External FM antenna
Use an external FM antenna instead of an indoor FM
antenna if you need better reception. Consult your dealer.
(4) External AM (MW/LW) antenna
Use an external AM (MW/LW) antenna if you need better
reception. Consult your dealer.
Note
When using an external AM (MW/LW) antenna, be sure to
keep the wire of the AM (MW/LW) loop antenna connected.
CONNECTIONS
FREQUENCY STEP switch (General model only)
Because the interstation frequency spacing differs in
different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch
(located at the rear) according to the frequency spacing in
your area. Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC
supply lead of this unit from the AC outlet.
or
15 m (49 feet)
7.5 m (25 feet)
Earth rod
E-13
English
Connecting external components
(See figure 9 on page 1111.)
This system can be connected with external audio and video
components. Make connections between this system and
other components using RCA pin plug connector cables
correctly, that is to say L (left) to L and R (right) to R. Also,
refer to the owner’s manual for each component to be
connected to this system.
Connecting the AC supply lead
(See figure @ on page 1122.)
•
After completing all connections, plug the AC supply lead
into a convenient AC outlet.
•
Unplug the AC supply lead from the AC outlet if the unit is
not to be used for a long period of time.
CONNECTIONS
(See figure A on page 1122.)
The front grille is fastened to the enclosure at four points, and
can be removed if desired. To remove the grille, first hold the
bottom of the grille and unfasten the lower part of the grille by
pulling it gently, and then hold both sides of the grille and
slowly pull straight away from the speaker. To reattach, line
up the four pegs on the inside surface of the grille with the
four corresponding holes on the speaker and push gently.
Note
When the grille is removed, take care not to touch the
speaker units with your hands or to exert excessive force with
tools.
REMOVING THE FRONT GRILLES OF FRONT SPEAKERS
(See figure B on page 1122.)
•
Be sure that your headphones have a 3.5 mm (1/8”)
diameter plug and are between 16 ohms and 50 ohms
impedance. Recommended impedance is 32 ohms.
•
When headphones are connected, the speakers are
defeated automatically and you can listen to the sound to
be output from the front speakers through headphones.
Adjust the VOLUME control for desired volume.
LISTENING WITH HEADPHONES
STANDBY mode
While the power is on, pressing the POWER switch (or the
POWER switch on the remote control transmitter) switches
the system to the STANDBY mode. (In this mode, the
display shows only the time.) In this mode, main voltage is
still present inside the system. If you want to switch off the
system completely, disconnect the AC power plug from the
AC outlet.
TURNING THE POWER ON/OFF TO THIS SYSTEM
(See figure C on page 1122.)
If the AC supply lead is connected to the AC outlet, this
system can be turned ON and OFF (STANDBY mode) by
pressing the POWER switch on the front panel of the main
unit or the POWER switch on the remote control transmitter.
Automatic power-off function
The power of this system will be automatically turned off if
there is no operation on the control parts of this system, no
illumination on the graphic equalizer level indicators and no
playback of CD or tape for about 30 minutes.
* This function is not available unless time setting is made
on the built-in clock.
E-14
If desired, you can adjust brightness of the display.
1 Press and hold the DISPLAY button for more than 2
seconds so that “DIMMER±0” appears on the display.
2 Holding the DISPLAY button pressed, turn the VOLUME
control clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease brightness.
This adjustment can be made even though the power of this
unit is off (in the standby mode).
Control range
When the power is on: ±0 to –6 (Preset value: ±0)
When the power is off: +3 to –3 (Preset value: ±0)
ADJUSTING BRIGHTNESS OF THE DISPLAY
Front panel operation
Rotate the VOLUME control to the “UP” direction to increase
the volume, and to the “DOWN” direction to decrease the
volume.
Remote control operation
Press the VOLUME + button to increase the volume and the
VOLUME – button to decrease the volume.
* Adjusted volume level is shown by the volume level meter
and in figures on the display.
VOLUME
DOWN UP
VOLUME
VOLUME
VOLUME CONTROL
SETTING THE CLOCK
(See figure D on page 1122.)
1 While the power is on, press the DISPLAY button to
display the time. If the power is off, you can proceed to the
next step.
2 While holding the TIME ADJ button pressed, press the
HOUR button and set the hour.
* Press the HOUR button once to advance the time by 1
hour. Press and hold to advance continuously.
* To reverse the hour, press the button instead of
the HOUR button.
3 While holding the TIME ADJ button pressed, press the
MIN button and set the minute.
* Press the MIN button once to advance the time by 1
minute. Press and hold to advance continuously.
* The hour setting will not advance even if minute is
advanced from “59” to “00”.
* To reverse the minute, press the button instead
of the MIN button.
Europe, U.K., Australia, China and Singapore models
use a 24-hour display. U.S.A. and Canada models use a
12-hour display shown by “AM (PM) 12:00”. For General
model, either the 24-hour display or the 12-hour display
is selected depending on the setting of the FREQUENCY
STEP switch on the rear panel, so you cannot select a
desired type freely.
In the event of a power failure or when the AC supply
lead is disconnected.
The time display will go out, however, the clock will function
for about 5 minutes without power supply. So you do not
have to reset the time if the AC power supply is resumed
within about 5 minutes.
When the AC power supply is resumed after more than 5
minutes pass without power supply, the time display will flash
on and off to indicate that the time must be reset.
E-15
English
SPEAKER BALANCE ADJUSTMENT
ANTENNA
FRONT
SPEAKERS
DO NOT CONNECT THIS UNIT TO SPEAKERS OTHER
THAN NX-C70 (CENTER) OR NX-E70 (REAR).
RL
R L
RL
SINCE THIS UNIT
HAS AN ACTIVE
SERVO CIRCUIT
BUILT–IN.
DO NOT CONNECT
IT TO SPEAKERS
OTHER THAN
NX–GX70.
75Ω UNBAL.
REAR CENTER REAR
FM GND AM
CENTER MODE
NORMAL
PHANTOM
SPEAKERS
CENTER/REAR
OUT
IN
VCR
LD/TV
OUT
MD/AUX
IN
AUDIO SIGNAL
OUT
SUBWOOFER VIDEO SIGNAL
MONITOR
OUT
CENTER MODE
NORMAL
PHANTOM
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
This procedure lets you adjust the sound output level balance
between the front, center, and rear speakers using the built-in
test tone generator. When this adjustment is performed, the
sound output level heard at the listening position will be the
same from each speaker. This is important for the best
performance of the built-in Doiby Pro Logic surround decoder.
The adjustment of each speaker output level should be
done at your listening position with the remote control
transmitter. Otherwise, the result may not be satisfactory.
Before operation
Set the CENTER MODE switch on the rear panel of the main
unit to the position suitable for your speaker system
configuration. (Refer to page 9 for details.)
NORMAL (For 5 speaker configuration):
Select this position when you use the center speaker.
PHANTOM (For 4 speaker configuration):
Select this position when you do not use the center
speaker. The center sound will be output from the left
and right front speakers.
1 Press the POWER switch to turn the power on.
2 Turn the VOLUME control fully counterclockwise to
decrease the volume to minimum.
3 Press the PROGRAM button once or more so that “
PRO LOGIC” lights up on the sound field program
indicator.
4 Press the TEST button.
* “TEST” flashes on and off on the display.
5 Press the VOLUME + (up) button to increase the volume.
You will hear a test tone (like pink noise) from the left front
speaker, then the center speaker, then the right front
speaker, and then the rear speakers, for about two seconds
each. The display changes as shown below.
* The test tone from the left rear speaker and the right rear
speaker will be heard at the same time.
(L and R)
CONTINUED
4
2
3
1
5
3
1
2, 5
E-16
SPEAKER BALANCE ADJUSTMENT
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
6 Adjust the sound output levels of the center speaker and
the rear speakers by using the LEVEL control buttons so
that they become almost as same as that of the front
speakers.
●
When the test tone is output from the center speaker,
pressing the LEVEL control buttons change the output
level of the center speaker.
●
When the test tone is output from the rear speakers,
pressing the LEVEL control buttons change the output
level of the rear speakers.
*
Pressing the + button raises and the – button lowers the
level.
7 If the adjustments have finished, press the TEST button to
cancel the test tone.
* “TEST” disappears from the display.
Notes
●
Once you have completed these adjustments, you can
adjust whole sound level on your audio system by using
the VOLUME control (or the VOLUME keys on the remote
control transmitter) only.
●
In step 6, if the center channel mode is in the “PHANTOM”
position, the sound output level of the center speaker
cannot be adjusted. This is because in this mode, the
center sound is automatically output from the left and right
front speakers.
USER
NOR TEST
PROGRAMMUSIC
PRO LOGIC
100 350 1K 3.5K 10K
USER
NOR TEST
PROGRAMMUSIC
PRO LOGIC
100 350 1K 3.5K 10K
Adjustable
Adjustable
7
6
E-17
English
CD playback
1 Press the CD input selector button.
2 Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to open the disc table.
3 Place discs on the trays, label side up.
* Up to three discs can be loaded on the trays.
To load the third disc, rotate the disc table by pressing
the DISC SKIP button on the remote control
transmitter.
* 8 cm (3”) discs may be played without an adaptor.
4 Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to close the disc table.
* The total number of tracks and the total playing time of
the disc being selected will be displayed for several
seconds.
* The music calendar will be displayed only for the
number of tracks on the disc being selected.
* If the compact disc contains more than 15 tracks, the
“OVER 15” indicator will light up on the music calendar.
5 If necessary, change the disc play mode by pressing the
disc play MODE selector button on the remote control
transmitter watching the display.
Single disc play mode: Only a designated disc is played
back.
All disc play mode: All discs on the disc table are played
back sequentially.
6 If necessary, select another disc by pressing the DISC
SKIP button on the remote control transmitter once or
more (so that the corresponding disc tray number is
located on the top of the disc indicator).
7 Press the play/pause / button to start playback from
track 1.
* The “ ” indicator will appear and playback will begin.
As the playback of each track on the music calendar is
finished, that track number will go out.
For easier operation
Pressing the DISC selector button (1, 2 or 3) will select the
disc directly, and playback will begin from track 1
automatically.
COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION
The disc on the tray located
on the top of this indicator is
now being selected.
Music calendar
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
TRACK
TOTAL
USER
TAPE 1
M
VOLUME
1234
78910
5
11
6
12
Lights up only when the all
disc play mode is selected.
DISC selector buttons
1
POWER
7 2, 4
3, 6
5
2, 4
7
1
POWER
1
2
3
Total number of tracks Total playing time
E-18
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
+I0
E
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION
Direct operation
When the power is off (in the standby mode), pressing the
CD input selector button or the DISC selector (1, 2 or 3)
button will turn the power on and start CD playback
automatically.
When the power is on, even if an input source other than CD
player is selected, pressing a DISC selector button or closing
the disc table by pushing the front edge of the disc table
gently will start playback directly. In this case, if the tape
deck is playing back a tape, it will be stopped automatically.
* These ways of playback can also be used to close the disc
table. If the table is closed in these ways, playback will
begin automatically, however, the display will not show the
total number of tracks and the total playing time of the disc
to be played back.
PLAYXCHANGE
During playback, you can open the disc table by pressing the
DISC CHANGE button without interrupting playback.
However, in this case, pressing the DISC SKIP button or a
DISC selector button has no effect.
Precautions
•
If TV or radio interference occurs during CD player
operation, move the unit away from the TV or radio.
•
Subjecting the unit to shock or vibration can cause
mistracking.
•
Playing back some compact discs at high volume can
cause mistracking. In this case, listen at lower volume.
•
Do not pull open the disc table forcibly with your hands.
•
Do not push the disc table while it is moving.
•
If the power fails while the table is open, wait until the
power supply returns or gently push the table manually to
close it.
•
The temperature range for playing back compact discs is
recommended to be 5°C (41°F) – 35°C (95°F).
Direct-selection playback
By using the track number input buttons on the remote
control transmitter, any track you wish to listen to can be
played back directly.
Use the track number input buttons to select the desired
track number. Playback will begin automatically.
A. For example, to choose selection 5
Press the “5” button.
B. For example, to choose selection 12
(1)Press the “+10” button.
(2)Within 3 seconds, press “2” button.
C. For example, to choose selection 20
(1)Press the “+10” button.
(2)Within 3 seconds, press the “+10” button again.
(3)Within 3 seconds, press the “0” button.
Note
If you select a track number higher than the number of tracks
on the disc, playback will begin from the last track on the
disc.
To interrupt playback
1 Press the play/pause / button.
* The “ ” indicator will flash.
2 Press the play/pause / button to resume playback
from the same point.
To stop playback
Press the stop button.
To switch the unit off after use
Turn the unit off by pressing the POWER switch. (The
indicators will go off except for the current time display.)
E-19
English
COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION
“Skip search” and “Manual search” are performed using the
same buttons.
Skip search
The beginning of any track can be found automatically.
1 Select a disc and begin playback.
2 Press the button to advance or button to
reverse through the disc.
Press once for each track to be advanced or reversed.
•
Press once to advance to the track following the
one now playing back.
•
Press once to return to the start of the track now
playing back.
•
Press twice to return to the track before the track
now playing back.
Notes
•
This function can also be performed while the unit is
stopped. Press the play/pause / button when your
desired track number appears on the track number
display. Playback will begin from the beginning of the
track.
•
This function will be performed forward or backward from
any point on the disc. However, it will not move forward
during playback of the final track.
Manual search
1 Begin playback.
2 Press and hold the button to advance playback
rapidly, and the button to reverse playback rapidly.
*
The sound can be heard (although slightly garbled)
during manual search in either direction. This is
convenient for reviewing the contents quickly.
Note
Manual search can also be performed while playback is
paused, though no sound will be heard.
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
2
1
1
2
TRACK
TOTAL
USER
TAPE 1
PROGRAM
OGIC HALL
PROG
VOLUME
OVER 15
1234
78910
13 14 15
5
11
6
12
TRACK
USER
TAPE 1
PROGRAM
OGIC HALL
PROG
VOLUME
OVER 15
1234
78910
13 14 15
5
11
6
12
E-20
COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION
Program play
You can program up to 20 tracks in any desired order.
1 Load discs and close the disc table.
2 When in the stop mode, press the PROG button to
prepare for programming.
* “PROG” and “P-01” will light up on the display, and all
track numbers on the selected disc begin flashing.
3 If necessary, select a desired disc by pressing the DISC
SKIP button.
4 Use the track number input buttons to select the desired
track number.
* The selected track number and the total play time of
the programmed tracks will light up on the display, and
soon it is replaced by the display of the next playback
order. Programmed track numbers on the selected disc
will stop flashing and light up on the music calendar.
* Pressing the TIME button displays the total play time of
the programmed tracks for about 1 second, and then it
is replaced by the display of the next playback order.
* For example, to choose selection 12
(1)Press the “+10” button.
(2)Within 3 seconds, press the “2” button.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for any other track. Up to 20 tracks
can be programmed.
6 Press the play/pause / button to start playback of
programmed tracks.
Notes
•
It is also possible to program a sequence of tracks while
looking at the list of tracks on the surface of the disc
before closing the disc table.
•
During playback or pause, programming is not possible.
•
If the total time of the programmed tracks becomes 100
minutes or more, the highest position of a figure will not be
displayed.
•
The total time of the programmed tracks will not be
displayed, if track number 16 or higher is programmed.
•
Skip search can be performed during playback, but only
within the range of the programmed tracks.
•
Manual search can be performed during playback to
search all tracks, including unprogrammed tracks.
•
If programs are made selecting tracks from more than one
disc, pressing the DISC CHANGE button is useless during
program play.
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
16
4
3
2
6
TIME
1
Display information during programming
Playback order
Music calendar Selected disc
Selected track number Total playing time
E-21
English
To stop program play
•
Press the stop button. The first programmed track
number will be displayed.
•
To resume playback, press the play/pause / button.
Playback will begin from the beginning of the program.
To cancel a programmed sequence
There are several methods as described below.
•
Press the stop button while the unit is stopped.
•
Open the disc table
•
Switch off the power.
COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION
To check program data
1. If during playing back, press the stop button.
2. Press the PROG button.
3. Each time the button is pressed, the track numbers
and sequential order of the programmed tracks can be
checked one after another. The display of the track
number can be returned (sequentially in reverse order) by
pressing the button.
To correct program data
1. Follow the procedure described in “To check program
data”.
2. Display the track number to be corrected by pressing the
or button.
3. Press a track number input button to select a track to
replace the one displayed. The previously programmed
track will be cleared from the memory and the new one
will be programmed.
4. When the correction has finished, press the PROG button
or play/pause / button once again.
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
/
PROG
/
E-22
Repeat play
All discs, an entire disc, a single track or a programmed
sequence can be continuously repeated.
1 While watching the display, press the REPEAT button
once or more to select a desired repeat play mode (S
REP or F REP).
2 Press the play/pause / button.
Repeat play modes
SINGLE REPEAT (S REP)
A single track is played back repeatedly.
* This is also available in the program play mode and the
random play mode. (If the repeat play mode is switched off,
the program play mode or the random play mode will be
resumed.)
FULL REPEAT (F REP)
When the unit is in the single disc play mode:
A designated disc is played back repeatedly.
* In the random play mode, the selected disc is repeatedly
played back, but the order of tracks is different every time.
When the unit is in the all disc play mode:
All discs on the disc table are played back repeatedly.
* In the random play mode, the random play is performed
among all discs and repeated with a different order of
tracks every time.
Note
In the program play mode, a sequence of programmed tracks
is played back repeatedly.
To cancel the repeat play
Press the REPEAT button once or more so that the (S, F)
REP indicator goes out.
COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
(off) S REP
F REP
2 1
1
2
E-23
English
Random play
Tracks on a selected disc or all discs on the disc table can be
played back in a random order.
1 Load discs and close the disc table.
2 If necessary, switch the disc play mode by pressing the
disc play MODE selector button.
* If the single disc play mode is selected, select a desired
disc by pressing the DISC SKIP button.
3 Press the RANDOM button to begin random play.
* The “RANDOM” indicator will light up.
To cancel the random play
Press the stop button, or press the RANDOM button
again. The “RANDOM” indicator will go out.
Note
This feature will not function during programming, or during
program play.
Switching the time display
Each time the TIME button is pressed, the display will
change as described below.
[Example]
When the second track is being played back (Refer to the
illustration on the left.)
➀ The elapsed play time for the track now playing back will
be displayed.
* 8 seconds have passed since the beginning of the
second track.
➁ The remaining play time for the current track will be
displayed.
* 2 minutes and 58 seconds remain till the end of the
second track.
➂ The total play time of the disc will be displayed.
(If the unit is in the program play mode, the total play time
of the programmed tracks will be displayed.)
➃ The total remaining play time from the point being played
at that time will be displayed.
* 41 minutes remain till the end of the disc.
Notes
● During random play, the total remaining play time on the
disc will not be displayed.
● The remaining play time will not be displayed for track
number 16 or higher.
● If track number 16 or higher is programmed, during the
program play, the total play time and the total remaining
play time will not be displayed.
COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
TRACK
TOTAL REM
TRACK
TOTAL
TRACK
REM
TRACK
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
31
1
3
2
TIME
➀
➁
➂
➃
E-24
Normally, if station signals are strong and there is no
interference, quick automatic-search tuning (Automatic
tuning) is possible. However, if signals of the station you
want to select are weak, you must tune to it manually
(Manual tuning).
Automatic tuning
1 Press the INPUT selector or button once or more
so that “TUNER” appears on the display.
2 Select the reception band [FM or AM (MW or LW)] by
pressing the PRESET/TUNING/BAND button confirming
it on the display.
* Do not select a preset tuning mode (in which
“PRESET” lights up on the display.)
3 Press the AUTO/MAN’L button so that “AUTO” appears
on the display.
(In this mode, stations are received in stereo or monaural
automatically.)
4 Press the button to tune to a higher frequency, or
press the button to tune to a lower frequency.
(When tuned in to a station, “TUNED” will light up on the
display.)
5 If the station where tuning search stopped is not the
desired one, follow step 4 again.
* If the tuning search does not stop at the desired station,
change to the Manual tuning method as described below.
* STEREO indicator will light up when an FM stereo
broadcast with sufficient signal strength is received.
Manual tuning
11 Follow steps 1 and 2 of the Automatic tuning method.
22 Press the AUTO/MAN’L button so that “AUTO”
disappears from the display.
(In this mode, stations are received in monaural.)
33 Press and hold the button to tune to a higher
frequency, or press and hold the button to tune to a
lower frequency.
Release it just before reaching the desired frequency,
and then press it repeatedly until the desired frequency
appears.
(When tuned in to a station, “TUNED” will light up on the
display.)
Note
If you tune in to an FM station manually, it is received in
monaural automatically to increase the signal quality.
Note
Pressing the TUNER input selector button on the remote
control transmitter switches the tuner from a normal tuning
mode to a preset tuning mode and vice versa.
“AM” is for U.S.A., Canada, Australia, China, Singapore
and General models.
“MW/LW” is for U.K. and Europe models.
TUNING OPERATION
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
4, 33
3, 22 1
1
2
E-25
English
TUNING OPERATION
Preset tuning
This unit can store station frequencies selected by tuning
operation. With this function, you can select any desired
station by only calling the corresponding preset station
number. Up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups) can be
stored.
To store stations
(Example: To store a station to A1)
1 Tune in to a desired station.
(Refer to the previous page for tuning procedure.)
2 Press the tuner MEMORY button.
* “MEMORY” and “PRESET” will flash on the display for
about 5 seconds.
3 Select a desired group (A – E) of preset stations by
pressing the A/B/C/D/E button confirming it on the
display, before “MEMORY” goes out.
(In this case, select group A.)
4
Select a preset station number by pressing the
or
button repeatedly before “MEMORY” goes out.
(In this case, select “1”.)
5 Within about 5 seconds, press the tuner MEMORY button
again.
* In the same way, program other stations to A2, A3 ... A8.
* You can program more stations to the preset station
numbers of other groups in the same way by selecting
other groups in step 3.
To recall a preset station
11 Select a group of preset stations by pressing the
A/B/C/D/E button.
22 Select the desired preset station number by pressing the
or button repeatedly.
Notes
•
A new setting can be programmed in place of the former
one.
•
For presets the setting of the AUTO/MAN’L button is
stored along with the station frequency.
For easier operation
By using the preset station number buttons and the
A,B,C,D,E selector buttons on the remote control transmitter,
a preset station number and a group can be selected directly.
The currently displayed station
has been programmed to A1.
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
MHz
PRESET
TAPE 1
AUTO
4, 22
2, 53, 11
3, 11
4, 22
E-26
Automatic preset tuning
You can also make use of an automatic preset tuning
function. By this function, this unit performs automatic tuning
and stores stations with strong signals sequentially. Up to 40
stations are stored automatically in the same way as in the
manual preset tuning method on the previous page.
1 Press the INPUT selector or button once or more
so that “TUNER” appears on the display.
2 Press and hold the tuner MEMORY button for about 2
seconds.
* The MEMORY and AUTO indicators will flash.
This unit performs automatic tuning and searches FM and
AM (MW and LW for U.K. and Europe models only) stations
in that order. Received stations are programmed to A1, A2 ...
A8 sequentially.
When the automatic preset tuning is completed
The display shows the frequencies of the first preset station
(stored to A1).
Check the contents and the number of preset stations by
following the procedure of the section “To recall a preset
station” on the previous page.
To recall a preset station
Simply follow the procedure of the section “To recall a preset
station” on the previous page.
Notes
•
The automatic preset tuning search will be performed
through all frequencies until 40 stations are stored. If the
number of received stations is less than 40, the search will
stop after searching all frequencies.
* Since FM stations are searched for first, there may be a
case that 40 preset stations are occupied by FM
stations only.
•
<U.K. and Europe models only>
The unit is originally set so that only RDS stations are
searched instead of all FM stations by this operation. (FM
stations that employ no RDS network service cannot be
programmed.)
However, you can change the setting so that the unit can
program not only RDS stations but also other FM stations.
(Refer to page 30 for details.)
•
With this function, only stations with sufficient signal
strength are stored automatically. If the station you want
to program is weak in signal strength, tune to it in
monaural manually and program it by following the
procedure of the section “To store stations” on the
previous page.
•
You can replace a preset station by another FM or AM
(MW or LW) station manually by simply following the
procedure of the section “To store stations” on the
previous page.
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
TUNING OPERATION
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
21
1
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the programmed
data from being lost even if the AC supply lead is
disconnected from the AC outlet or the power is cut due
to temporary power failure. If, however, the power is cut
for more than one week, the memory may be erased. If
so, it can be re-programmed by simply following the
Preset tuning steps.
E-27
English
Displaying RDS data
This unit can be turned into the following four modes to
display RDS data.
PS (Program Service name) mode:
Displays the name of the RDS station
now being received instead of the
frequency.
PTY (Program Type) mode:
Displays the type of the program on the RDS station now
being received. There are 15 program types to classify RDS
stations as follows.
RT (Radio Text) mode:
Displays information about the program (such as title of the
song, name of the singer, etc.) on the RDS station now being
received.
CT (Clock Time) mode:
Displays current time. This signal comes from the RDS station
now being received. Time of the built-in clock can be
automatically corrected on the basis of this signal.
RDS (Radio Data System) is a data transmission system
gradually being introduced by FM stations in many countries.
Stations using this system transmit an inaudible stream of
data in addition to the normal radio signal.
RDS data contains various information, such as PI (Program
Identification), PS (Program Service name), PTY (Program
Type), RT (Radio Text), CT (Clock Time), etc.
RDS function is carried out among the network stations.
* This unit utilizes PS, PTY, RT and CT to receive RDS
broadcast stations.
News:
Short accounts of facts, events and publicly
expressed views, reportage and actuality.
Current affairs:
Topical program expanding or enlarging
upon the news, generally in different
presentation style or concept, including
documentary debate, or analysis
Information:
Program whose purpose is to impart advice
in the widest sense, including
meteorological reports and forecasts,
consumer affairs, medical help, etc.
Sport:
Program concerned with any aspect of
sport.
Education:
Program intended primarily to educate, of
which the formal element is fundamental.
Drama:
All radio plays and serials.
Culture:
Programs concerned with any aspect of
national or regional culture, including
religious affairs, philosophy, social science,
language, theatre, etc.
Science:
Programs about the natural sciences and
technology.
Varied:
Used for mainly speech-based programs
usually of light-entertainment nature, not
covered by above categories. Examples
are: quizzes, panel games, personality
interviews, comedy and satire.
Pop:
Commercial music, which would generally
be considered to be of current popular
appeal, often featuring in current or recent
record sales charts.
Rock:
Contemporary modern music, usually
written and performed by young musicians.
M.O.R.:
(Middle of the Road Music). Common term
to describe music considered to be “easy-
listening”, as opposed to Pop, Rock or
Classical. Music in this category is often but
not always, vocal, and usually of short
duration (<5 min.)
Light classics:
Classical Musical for general, rather than
specialist appreciation. Examples of music
in this category are instrumental music, and
vocal or choral works.
Serious classics:
Performances of major orchestral works,
symphonies, chamber music etc., and
including Grand Opera.
Other music:
Musical styles not fitting into any of the
above categories. Particularly used for
specialist music, of which Jazz, Rhythm &
Blues, Folk, Country, and Reggae are
examples.
NEWS
AFFAIRS
INFO
SPORT
EDUCATE
DRAMA
CULTURE
SCIENCE
VARIED
POP M
ROCK M
M.O.R. M
LIGHT M
CLASSICS
OTHER M
BBC R3
RECEIVING RDS STATIONS
<
U.K. and Europe models only
>
E-28
Changing the RDS modes
When an RDS station is received, by pressing the FREQ
PS/PTY/RT/CT selector button once or more, you can
change the display mode among the RDS
modes employed
by the received station in the order shown below. (The RDS
mode not employed by the station cannot be selected.)
* If the station is not an RDS station, pressing the FREQ
PS/PTY/RT/CT selector button displays “NO RDS” on the
display, and then it returns to the frequency display mode.
* When an RDS station is received, the display is
automatically turned into the PS mode. Do not press the
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT selector button until the display is
turned into the PS mode. If the button is pressed before
the display mode is changed, it may occur that “NO PS”
appears on the display. This is because the unit has not
received all of the RDS data on the station yet.
➀ Frequency display mode
The frequency of the station being received is
displayed.
➁ PS (Program Service name) mode
The name of the station being received is displayed
using characters selected from among 64 Roman
Alphabets including umlaut sign. If other characters
are used on the PS data, they are displayed with
underbars.
“PS WAIT” may flash while the unit is receiving the
data.
If the station does not employ the PS data service,
“NO PS” lights up on the display for about 2 seconds
and then returns to frequency display mode.
➂ PTY (Program Type) mode
The type of the program on the station being received
is displayed. If the RDS station does not employ the
PTY data service, “NO PTY” lights up on the display
for about 2 seconds and then returns to frequency
display mode.
If the station has PS data, after that, it turns into the
PS mode.
In this mode, you can make this unit search for a
station which is broadcasting a program of your
desired program type. For details, refer to the next
page.
➃ RT (Radio Text) mode
Information about the program on the station being
received is displayed. Information is displayed by a
maximum of 64 Roman Alphabets including umlaut
sign. If other characters are used on the RT data, they
are displayed with underbars.
“RT WAIT” may flash while the unit is receiving the
data.
If the RDS station does not employ the RT data
service, “NO RT” lights up on the display for about 2
seconds and then returns to frequency display mode.
If the station has PS data, after that, it turns into the
PS mode.
➄ CT (Clock Time) mode
Current time is displayed in the following form. The
CT data from the station being received changes
every minute.
This unit corrects time of the built-in clock by
synchronizing it with the CT data. (This function can
also be canceled, if so desired. Refer to page 30 for
details.)
“CT WAIT” may flash while the unit is receiving the
data. If the data is accidentally cut off, “CT WAIT” may
flash and then turn into “NO CT”.
If the RDS station does not employ the CT data
service, “NO CT” lights up on the display for about 2
seconds and then returns to frequency display mode.
If the station has PS data, after that, it turns into the
PS mode.
1 Frequency
display mode
2 PS mode
3 PTY mode
5 CT mode
4 RT mode
RANDOM
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MUSIC
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
Hour Minute
RECEIVING RDS STATIONS
<
U.K. and Europe models only
>
E-29
English
Calling a program of your desired
program type from among preset
RDS stations (PTY SEEK)
By designating a program type, the unit automatically
searches all preset FM stations for an RDS station which
broadcasts a program of that program type.
* There are 15 program types to classify RDS stations. For
details, refer to page 27.
1 Turn the unit into the PTY SEEK mode by pressing the
PTY SEEK MODE button.
* The name of the program type of the station now being
received or “NEWS” flashes on the display.
2 Select the desired program type with the or
button.
* If there is no operation for about 20 seconds, this mode
is canceled and turns into the frequency display. If the
station has PS data, after that, it turns into the PS
mode.
3 Press the PTY SEEK START button.
The unit begins searching all preset FM stations.
* “PTY HOLD” lights up on the display.
* The preset number indicator, the name of the program
type and “AUTO” flash. The preset number changes
rapidly in sequence.
● If a station which broadcasts a program of the program
type is found, the unit stops at the station and turns into the
frequency display. If the station has PS data, after that, it
turns into the PS mode.
● If the called station is not the desired one, press the PTY
SEEK START button once more before “PTY HOLD” goes
out from the display. The unit begins searching for another
station which broadcasts a program of the same program
type.
● If no station is found, “NO PTY” appears and then returns
to frequency display. If the station has PS data, after that,
it turns into the PS mode.
* If the PTY SEEK START button is pressed once more
during searching, this mode is canceled and turns into
the frequency display. If the station has PS data, after
that, it turns into the PS mode.
To cancel this function
If the PTY SEEK MODE button is pressed once more, the
PTY SEEK mode is canceled and turns into the frequency
display. If the station has PS data, after that, it turns into the
PS mode.
Notes
● RDS data service cannot be utilized by this unit if the
received signal is not strong enough. Especially, the RT
(Radio Text mode) needs much data to be received, so it
may occur that RT mode cannot be displayed even if other
RDS modes (PS, PTY, etc.) are displayed.
● There may be a case that RDS data reception is not
possible due to poor reception conditions. If so, press the
AUTO/MAN’L button so that “AUTO” goes off from the
display. Though the reception mode is changed to
monaural by this operation, when you change the display to
an RDS mode, RDS data may be displayed.
● If the signal strength gets weakened by external
interference during receiving an RDS station, the RDS data
service may be cut off suddenly and turn into the frequency
display mode.
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
2 1 3
RECEIVING RDS STATIONS
<
U.K. and Europe models only
>
E-30
RECEIVING RDS STATIONS
<
U.K. and Europe models only
>
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
➀ ON (OFF) CT > CLOCK
This unit corrects the time of the built-in clock
automatically by synchronizing it with the CT data on the
RDS station being received.
* If you receive an RDS station of some other country,
the built-in clock is synchronized with the time setting
of the country.
* If the built-in clock is not yet set for current time or
reset due to a power failure etc., it will be set for the
time of the CT data automatically, whether this setting
is ON or OFF.
➁ ON (OFF) LOCAL > CT
If the RDS station being received employs the local time
(summer time etc.) data service, its time is displayed in
the CT mode.
* If the setting of function
➀is “ON”, the built-in clock is
synchronized with the local time data.
➂ ON (OFF) A. M. > RDS
Only RDS stations are searched instead of all FM
stations by the automatic preset tuning operation when
the setting is ON.
(See page 26 for the operating procedure.)
If you switch this function OFF, not only RDS stations but
also other FM stations are programmed along with MW
and LW stations by the automatic preset tuning
operation.
To switch these functions on and off
1 Select the FM band by pressing the
PRESET/TUNING/BAND button, confirming it on the
display.
2 Press the DISPLAY button to display the current time.
3 Press the FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT selector button.
The title of function
➀“ON CT >CLOCK ” is displayed.
4 Select the title of function whose setting you want to
switch by pressing the PTY SEEK MODE button once or
more.
5 Switch the function ON or OFF by pressing the PTY SEEK
START button, confirming it on the display.
6 Press the FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT selector button again to
restore the frequency display mode.
* If the station has PS data, after that, it turns into the PS
mode.
Notes
● Once the setting is changed, it will be stored until it is
changed again by the above operation.
● During the operation, if there is no operation for about 20
seconds, this mode is canceled and turns into the
frequency display.
If the station has PS data, after that, it turns into the PS
mode.
1 3, 6 4 5 2
1
2
3
REPEAT
MODE
PTY SEEK
Other functions which make use
of RDS data service
This unit has the following functions which make use of RDS
data service. These are originally in operation [ON].
However, you can cancel these functions [OFF], if so
desired.
E-31
English
Detection hole
Tab
TAPE DECK OPERATION
General information
•
Do not use C-120 tapes or poor-quality tapes, since they
can cause malfunctions.
•
Before loading a tape into the cassette compartment,
tighten the tape slack with a pen or pencil.
•
Tapes have removable tabs which prevent accidental
recording or erasing from taking place. Removing the tab
on the top left protects the side facing you from erasure.
Cover the tab holes with adhesive tape to erase or record
again.
•
This deck is a Double Cassette Deck with Automatic
Reverse Function.
Deck 1: Playback only.
Deck 2: Playback or recording.
•
This deck features an auto tape selector. Just load the
tape, and the tape formula being used will be sensed
automatically.
•
This unit can play back metal tapes as well as normal or
chrome tapes, however recording cannot be done on
metal tapes with good sound quality.
•
When covering erasure prevention tab holes, do not cover
the chrome and metal detection holes. Otherwise, the
deck will treat tape as normal tape.
•
Do not press the EJECT button during playback or
recording.
Automatic deck selecting function
If you load only one tape into the deck 1 or deck 2 cassette
compartment, it is automatically selected and set ready for a
playback.
About the tape counter
This unit is equipped with a tape counter that is useful for
searching for and locating a desired point on tape. The tape
counter for the tape 1 (or 2) currently selected is shown on
the display.
Pressing the stop button when the unit is stopped will
reset the tape counter to “0000”.
Dolby B Type Noise Reduction
Dolby noise reduction is an extremely effective method of
reducing undesirable background hiss on tapes. This unit
incorporates Dolby B type noise reduction system that is the
most popular one and almost of commercially available
music tapes are recorded with the Dolby B NR.
Dolby B NR has a noise reduction effect of about 10 dB in
the high frequency range.
Dolby noise reduction is a 2 part process that acts both on
recording and playback; be sure that the same noise
reduction is used on recording and playback.
Notes
● Tapes encoded with Dolby NR system should be decoded
with the same Dolby NR system. Nevertheless, a Dolby
encoded tape can be played back without decoding (and
vice versa) with no harm to the recorded sound.
● Noise in the source material cannot be reduced with the
Dolby NR system.
Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
“DOLBY” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
USER
TAPE 1
PROGRAM
HALL
VOLUME
B
E-32
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
2
1
Tape 1 or tape 2 playback
1 Press the TAPE 1/2 input selector button.
2 Open the deck 1 or deck 2 cassette compartment by
pressing the EJECT button.
3 Load a tape into the deck 1 or deck 2 cassette
compartment, and close the lid panel completely by
pressing the panel until it clicks.
* If you have loaded two tapes into both the cassette
compartments, select either the tape 1 or tape 2 which
you want to play back by pressing the TAPE 1/2 input
selector button on the front panel or the TAPE 1/2
button on the remote control transmitter confirming it on
the display.
4 Use the Dolby NR system by pressing the DOLBY NR
button so that “ B” lights up on the display, if the tape
has been recorded with Dolby noise reduction. If not so,
set the DOLBY NR button so that “ B” does not light up.
* For details, refer to the “Dolby B Type Noise
Reduction” on page 31.
5 If necessary, switch the reverse mode to the desired one
by pressing the reverse MODE selector button so that the
corresponding indicator lights up.
The reverse MODE selector button can be operated before
or during playback, and changes tape playback as follows:
6 Press the play button on the remote control transmitter
to listen to side A, or the play button for side B.
* When using the play button on the front panel:
Pressing the button once begins playback in the
direction currently selected. Pressing the play button
once more changes the tape running direction
and begins playback.
* The play direction indicator on the display shows the
currently selected tape direction.
To stop playback
Press the stop button.
TAPE DECK OPERATION
2 6 2
4 5 1, 3
3
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
1
3
6
Side A only
Side B only
Side A → Side B
(Repeats 8 times)
Starts from side A.
Side A → Side B
(Repeats 8 times)
Starts from side B. (Side A is
not played at the first time.)
Moves slowly in the current tape running
direction during playback.
Play direction indicator
E-33
English
Winding the tape
1 If during playback, first press the stop button.
2 Next press the fast wind or fast wind button to
wind the tape.
3 Press the stop button to stop.
Note
When the tape is wound to the end, this unit will then function
as described below, according to the setting of the reverse
MODE selector button.
: The tape stops at the end.
: When the tape reaches the end, playback
automatically starts from the reverse side.
Searching for the beginning of a
desired selection
Carry out the following operation during playback to find the
beginning of a desired selection on the tape.
To listen to the same selection
Press the button if the direction of the current playback
is .
Press the button if the direction of the current playback
is .
To listen to the next selection
Press the button if the direction of the current playback
is .
Press the button if the direction of the current playback
is .
Notes
•
This function may not work for tapes with
* Material with long pauses or quiet passages.
* Low recording levels or excessive noise.
* Pauses of less than 4 seconds between selections.
•
If searching is carried out at the first or the last part of a
selection, the desired selection may not be found.
Direct operation
When the power is off (in the standby mode), pressing the
TAPE 1/2 input selector button or the play button will turn the
power on and start playback of the selected tape
automatically.
When the power is on, even if an input source other than tape
deck is selected, pressing the play button (or the fast wind
button) will start playback (or fast winding) directly.
Notes
•
When removing the tape, press the stop button, and
then open the cassette compartment.
•
Even if you press the TAPE 1/2 input selector button on
the front panel or the TAPE 1/2 button on the remote
control transmitter during playback, the playback of
currently selected tape cannot be changed to the other
one though the tape number indicator on the display
changes.
TAPE DECK OPERATION
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
Moves rapidly in the direction of the
current playback while searching.
Flashes on and off.
Moves rapidly in the direction of the
current playback while searching.
E-34
Continuous playback
1 Load the tapes into the deck 1 and deck 2 cassette
compartments.
2 If the reverse mode “ ” is not selected, press the
reverse MODE selector button to select it.
The reverse MODE selector button can be operated before
or during playback, and changes tape playback as follows:
3 Select the tape to be played back first by pressing the
TAPE 1/2 input selector button or the TAPE 1/2 button.
4 Press the play button on the remote control transmitter
to listen to side A, or the play button for side B.
* When using the play button on the front panel:
Pressing the button once begins playback in the
direction currently selected. Pressing the play button
once more changes the tape direction and
begins playback.
<Tape 1>
<Tape 1>
TAPE DECK OPERATION
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
1 2 4 3 1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
4
Tape 1 Side A → B → Tape 2 Side A → B
(Repeats 8 times)
Starts from Tape 1 Side A.
Tape 1 Side A → B → Tape 2 Side A → B
(Repeats 8 times)
Starts from Tape 1 Side B. (Tape 1 Side A
is not played back at the first time.)
3
E-35
English
General information
• When recording important selections, be sure to make a
preliminary test to ensure that the desired source material
is being properly recorded with good sound quality.
• The automatic recording level control circuit automatically
controls the level of the input signal used for recording.
• Adjusting the VOLUME control has no effect on the
recorded sound.
If, however, the built-in graphic equalizer and/or sound
field processor is used, its effect is recorded along with
the source.
* Music with an equalizer effect is suitable for listening to
inside a car etc.
• For the tape deck, the deck which can be used for
recording is deck 2 only. When recording, be sure to load
a tape into the deck 2 cassette compartment.
• Recording cannot be done if the tape deck is selected as
the playback source.
CD synchronized recording
1 Press the CD input selector button and load the disc to be
recorded.
2 Load a tape into the deck 2 cassette compartment.
* Wind past the beginning part of the tape on which
recording cannot be performed.
3 When recording with the Dolby NR system, press the
DOLBY NR button so that “ B” lights up on the display.
If not, turn it off.
* For details, refer to the “Dolby B Type Noise
Reduction” on page 31.
4 If desired, switch the reverse mode by pressing the
reverse MODE selector button.
When the tape is set so that side A faces you, recording will
be done as follows automatically according to the selected
reverse mode.
5 Press the REC/PAUSE button.
* “REC” lights up on the display.
6 Start CD playback by pressing the corresponding DISC
selector button, or by pressing the play/pause /
button if the disc is already selected.
* Before CD playback begins, recording automatically
begins on the side of the tape now selected.
RECORDING COMPACT DISCS
3 4 5 2
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
Side A only
Side B only
Side A → Side B
Side B only
6 1 6
1
6
5
E-36
To stop recording temporarily
1 Press the stop button of the CD player.
2 Choose the selection to be recorded next by using the
or button, and then press the play/pause /
button of the CD player to resume recording (or simply
press the track number input button on the remote control
transmitter).
To stop recording
Press the stop button of the tape deck.
(At this time, CD playback will not stop.)
Recording programmed tracks
Programmed tracks from one or more discs can also be
recorded in the same way.
1 Program desired tracks from one or more discs. (Refer to
page 20 for the programming procedure.)
2 Follow steps 2–5 on the previous page.
3 Press the play/pause / button of the CD player.
Notes
•
During CD Synchronized Recording, when more than 4
seconds elapse between tracks, the tape will stop
automatically and resume recording when the beginning
of the next track is found.
•
The CD Synchronized Recording will function even when
the CD player is turned into random play mode.
RECORDING COMPACT DISCS
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
/
/
Returning the tape to the point where the recording started automatically (REC RETURN function)
During recording, by only pressing the or button,
you can rewind the tape to the point where the recording
started automatically.
•
Press the button when the play direction indicator
is lit up.
•
Press the button when the play direction indicator
is lit up.
* This function is available to all recording methods.
E-37
English
Recording CD(s) on both sides of
a tape automatically
1 Press the CD input selector button and load the disc to be
recorded.
2 Select the disc by pressing the DISC SKIP button.
3 Load a tape into the deck 2 cassette compartment.
4 When recording with the Dolby NR system, press the
DOLBY NR button so that “ B” lights up on the display.
If not, turn it off.
* For details, refer to the “Dolby B Type Noise
Reduction” on page 31.
5 If the reverse mode “ ” is not selected, press the
reverse MODE selector button to select it.
6 Press the EDIT button. (“EDIT” appears on the display.)
CD playback and recording starts. Recording is carried
out on side A and B of the tape continuously.
* If the tape has not rewound to the end, it is rewound to
the end rapidly before recording starts.
Recording starts from the first part of the tape on which
recording can be done.
* “A ” (or “ B”) on the display shows the side of
the tape on which recording is being carried out.
* When the recording on side A finishes while a track is
being played back, the sound is automatically faded
out, and then the recording stops.
The recording on side B starts from the beginning of
the same track.
Notes
•
When this CD player is in the all disc play mode, if the
tape’s total possible recording time is longer than the total
playing time of the selected disc, tracks on another disc
are recorded continuously.
In this case, as many as three discs can be recorded
automatically.
•
During recording, the DISC CHANGE button on the CD
player is disabled.
•
The CD player’s repeat play mode will be canceled during
this recording mode.
Recording programmed tracks
Programmed tracks from one or more discs can also be
recorded in the same way.
11 Program desired tracks from one or more discs. (Refer to
page 20 for the programming procedure.)
22 Follow steps 3–6 described above.
To cancel this function
Before recording, press the stop button of the CD player
or the tape deck.
To stop recording
Press the stop button of the tape deck.
(At this time, CD playback automatically stops.)
RECORDING COMPACT DISCS
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
4 5 3
1 6 1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
6
1
1
2
E-38
Automatic tape-editing
This convenient feature can be used to program tracks on a
disc (or discs) for recording to tape. By only memorizing the
tape’s total possible recording time, the unit will automatically
program tracks or help you to program tracks so they will fit
onto the tape with the least amount of unrecorded space
remaining at each end of the tape.
To record a disc with the order of tracks
unchanged
1 Press the CD input selector button and load a disc to be
recorded.
2 Select the disc by pressing the DISC SKIP button.
3 Load a tape into the deck 2 cassette compartment.
4 When recording with the Dolby NR system, press the
DOLBY NR button so that “ B” lights up on the display.
If not, turn it off.
* For details, refer to the “Dolby B Type Noise
Reduction” on page 31.
5 If the reverse mode “ ” is not selected, press the
reverse MODE selector button to select it.
6 Press the TAPE button on the remote control transmitter
to select the length of the tape to be used. Whenever
pressed, C-46, C-54, C-60 and C-90 appear on the
display in turn, and next it returns to the normal display
mode.
When using tapes other than C-46, C-54, C-60 or C-90
When C-46, C-54, C-60 or C-90 is appearing on the
display, input the tape length by using the track number
input buttons on the remote control transmitter
(Examples)
C-62: Press “6” and then “2”.
C-30: Press “3” and then “0”, or press “+10” three times
and then “0”.
7 Press the EDIT button. (“EDIT” appears on the display.)
The following internal operations are carried out before
recording is automatically started.
*
If the tape has not rewound to the end, it is rewound to
the end rapidly before recording starts.
1)Tracks on the disc are automatically divided between
side A and side B. You can check the process by
watching the display.
2)The end part of the tape on which recording cannot be
done is wound.
3)CD playback and recording starts. Recording is carried
out on both side A and B of the tape.
(off) C-46 C-54 C-60 C-90
→→
→→
→
RECORDING COMPACT DISCS
1 7 1
4 5 3
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
6
6
7
2
1
1
E-39
English
RECORDING COMPACT DISCS
Notes
•
When this CD player is in the all disc play mode, if the
tape’s total possible recording time is longer than the total
playing time of the selected disc, tracks on another disc
are recorded continuously.
In this case, as many as three discs can be recorded
automatically.
•
The CD player’s repeat play mode will be canceled during
this recording mode.
To cancel tape-editing function
Before recording, press the stop button of the CD player
or the tape deck.
To stop recording
Press the stop button of the tape deck.
(At this time, CD playback automatically stops.)
To make this unit program tracks on a disc
automatically so that the least amount of
unrecorded space remains on the tape
1 Follow steps 1– 6 on the previous page.
2 Press the PROG button.
3 Press the TAPE button.
“AP- A
> ” will light up during programming for side A,
and “AP- B
> ” will light up during programming for side
B.
* After “AP- B
> ” goes out from the display, you can
check the programmed contents for side A and B
respectively.
To check, cancel or correct program data, refer to page
21.
4 Press the EDIT button. (“EDIT” appears on the display.)
The recording is automatically started.
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
4
2
3
4
TRACK
REM
USER
TAPE 1
RAM
HALL
PROG
VOLUME
OVER 15
1234
78910
13 14 15
5
11
6
12
B
A
TRACK
USER
TAPE 1
GRAM
HALL
PROG
VOLUME
OVER 15
1234
78910
13 14 15
5
11
6
12
B
A
E-40
RECORDING COMPACT DISCS
To record programmed tracks from one or
more discs
1 Press the CD input selector button and load a disc (or
discs) on the disc table.
2 Follow steps 3–6 on page 38.
3 Press the PROG button.
* “PROG” and “P-01” will light up on the display, and all
track numbers on the selected disc will begin flashing.
4 If necessary, select a desired disc by pressing the DISC
SKIP button.
5 Select the desired track number by pressing the track
number input buttons.
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to program more selections for the
side A of the tape. You can select the same track again.
* Pressing the TIME button displays the total remaining
time on the side of the tape for about 1 second, and
then it is replaced by the display of the next playback
order.
* If “TM OVER” appears on the display, the track number
just selected cannot be programmed because there is
not enough time remaining on the side A of the tape.
However, at this time, if any other track number is
flashing continuously on the display, you can program
it instead of the unprogrammable one.
7 After you finish the programming for the side A, press the
TAPE button.
* “PU SET” appears on the display, then you can begin
programming for side B.
* After this step is done, you can check the programmed
contents for side A and side B alternately by pressing
the TAPE button at any time before you press the EDIT
button in step 9.
8 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to program selections for the side B
of the tape. You can select the same track again.
* If “TM OVER” appears on the display, the track number
just selected cannot be programmed because there is
not enough time remaining on the side B of the tape.
However, at this time, if any other track number is
flashing continuously on the display, you can program
it instead of the unprogrammable one.
9 Press the EDIT button. (“EDIT” appears on the display.)
The recording is automatically started.
Notes on tape-editing
•
If programs are made selecting tracks from more than one
disc, during recording, the DISC CHANGE button on the
CD player is disabled.
•
To check, cancel or correct program data, refer to page
21.
•
The maximum number of tracks that can be programmed
is 20.
•
This function can be used to program up to track number
15. If the disc has more than 15 tracks, track number 16
and thereafter will not be programmed.
Display information during programming
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
191
3
7
4
5
9
1
Side of the tape
Selected disc
Next playback order
Programmed track numbers light up
and unprogrammed ones flash.
Selected track
number
Total remaining time on
the side of the tape
TIME
1
E-41
English
General information
• When recording important selections, be sure to make a
preliminary test to ensure that the desired source material
is being properly recorded with good sound quality.
• The automatic recording level control circuit automatically
controls the level of the input signal used for recording.
• Adjusting the VOLUME control has no effect on the
recorded sound.
If, however, the built-in graphic equalizer and/or sound
field processor is used, its effect is recorded along with
the source.
* Music with an equalizer effect is suitable for listening to
inside a car etc.
• For the tape deck, the deck which can be used for
recording is deck 2 only. When recording, be sure to load
a tape into the deck 2 cassette compartment.
Recording from the built-in tuner
1 Press the INPUT selector or button once or more
so that “TUNER” appears on the display.
2 Tune to the desired station. (Refer to the “TUNING
OPERATION” on page 24 and 25.)
3 Load a tape into the deck 2 cassette compartment.
4 When recording with the Dolby NR system, press the
DOLBY NR button so that “ B” lights up on the display.
If not, turn it off.
* For details, refer to the “Dolby B Type Noise
Reduction” on page 31.
5 Select the reverse mode “ ” to record on only one
side, or “ ” for continuous recording on both sides by
pressing the reverse MODE selector button.
6 Press the REC/PAUSE button.
* “REC” lights up on the display.
7 Press the play button on the remote control transmitter
to record on side A, or the play button to record on
side B.
* For continuous recording on both sides, begin on side
A. Recording stops automatically at the end of side B.
To stop recording temporarily
11 Press the REC/PAUSE button.
22 To resume recording, press the play button.
To stop recording
Press the stop button.
To reduce beats during recording
While recording an AM (long wave) broadcast, you may hear
a bleep caused by beat frequencies. In such a case, pressing
the TUNER input selector button on the remote control
transmitter once or more will reduce or remove beats.
(Whenever the TUNER input selector button is pressed,
“B.C–1” and “B.C–2” appears on the display alternately.
Select either of them in which you find that beats are more
reduced.)
OTHER RECORDINGS
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
1
4 5 6, 11 3
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
7, 22
6, 11
1
E-42
Dubbing
•
During dubbing, adjusting the VOLUME control and using
the built-in graphic equalizer and the sound field
processor have no effect on the recorded sound.
•
Try to use the same tape formula and length for the
recording tape as for the master tape.
1 Press the TAPE 1/2 input selector button.
2 Load a prerecorded tape into the deck 1 cassette
compartment. Insert a blank tape into the deck 2 cassette
compartment.
3 Select the reverse mode “ ” to record on only one
side, or “ ” for continuous recording on both sides by
pressing the reverse MODE selector button.
4 Press the DUBBING button.
* Press “NORMAL” to dub at normal speed, and “HIGH”
to dub at about twice the normal speed.
* Dubbing will begin from side A regardless of the side
now selected.
To stop dubbing
Press the stop button.
* Tape 1 and tape 2 will stop at the same time.
Note
Only tapes originally encoded with Dolby NR will be dubbed
onto tapes with Dolby NR encoding.
Even if the Dolby NR is on, it will have no effect on the
recording of tape 2 during dubbing.
However, the playback tonal quality of tape 1 will change
according to whether the Dolby NR button is on or off.
Erasing recorded tapes
11 Load the tape to be erased into the deck 2 cassette
compartment.
22 Press the INPUT selector or button once or more
and select an input source position of external unit
(MD/AUX, VCR or LD/TV).
* Make sure that there is no sound output from the
selected external unit.
33 Select the reverse mode “ ” to erase only one side or
“ ” to erase both sides by pressing the reverse MODE
selector button.
44 Press the REC/PAUSE button, then press the play
button on the remote control transmitter to erase side A of
the tape, or the play button to erase side B.
OTHER RECORDINGS
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
1 22
2 3, 33 44 4 2, 11
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
1, 22
44
44
E-43
English
OPERATING EXTERNAL UNITS CONNECTED WITH THIS SYSTEM
To listen to or watch a source on an
external unit connected with this
system
1
Press the INPUT selector or button once or more
and select the position of input source (MD/AUX, VCR or
LD/TV) you will play back confirming it on the display.
* The names of input source positions correspond with
the names of terminals to connect with external units
on the rear of the main unit.
2 Play back the source.
(For a video source, turn the monitor TV on.)
3 Adjust the volume to a desired level by using the
VOLUME control.
If you prefer, use the graphic equalizer and/or the sound
field processor built into this system.
To record a source to tape
Not only a source played back on this system, but also a
source played back on an external unit can be recorded by
the built-in tape deck and/or a VCR, DAT, etc. connected
with this system.
* If you make a recording on the built-in tape deck, read
“General information” on page 41 before starting recording.
11 Select the source to be recorded by the INPUT selector
or button.
22 Play back the source and then turn the VOLUME control
up to confirm the input source.
33 Begin recording on the built-in tape deck or a VCR etc.
connected with this system.
* To make a recording on the built-in tape deck, follow
steps 3–7 on page 41.
To stop recording or to stop recording temporarily, also
refer to page 41.
Note
If the built-in graphic equalizer and/or sound field processor
is used, its effect is recorded along with the source when you
make recording on the following recording units.
● The built-in tape deck.
● The external recording unit connected to the MD/AUX
terminals on the rear of the main unit.
However, the effect of the graphic equalizer and/or sound
field processor cannot be recorded when you make recording
on the external recording unit connected to the VCR
terminals on the rear of the main unit.
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
1, 11
1, 11
3, 22
3, 22
E-44
The built-in graphic equalizer presents you with the pleasure
of listening to music with various sound effects.
This system provides 4 preset equalizer modes as listed
right.
You can enjoy listening to music with a desired sound effect
by selecting one of these modes.
In addition, the built-in 5 band graphic equalizer allows you to
adjust the equalizer pattern to create an effect for your
desired sound taste.
Preset graphic equalizer modes (MUSIC)
USING GRAPHIC EQUALIZER
Mode
ROCK
BLUES
RAP
JAZZ
Feature
High and low frequencies are emphasized.
This mode is suitable for reproducing
dynamic and powerful sounds of rock
music etc.
Low and medium frequencies are
moderately emphasized. This mode is
suitable for music with a blue feeling.
Low and mid-high frequencies are
emphasized so that vocals become well-
modulated. This mode is suitable for rap
music etc.
Medium frequencies for vocals, piano, sax,
etc. are emphasized. High and low
frequencies are also emphasized
moderately.
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
MUSIC
ROCK BLUES
RAP JAZZ
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
2
2
Listening to the music with a
preset equalizer effect
1 Play back a source. (For source playback, refer to the
sections beginning on page 17.)
2 Press the MUSIC button once or more so that the name
of a desired mode appears on the preset equalizer mode
indicator.
* Whenever you press the MUSIC button, the preset
mode changes and is displayed as follows.
* The equalizer pattern of the selected mode is shown on
the graphic equalizer level indicators.
Note
An equalizer effect is also be recorded along with a source
when recording on the built-in tape deck.
ROCK BLUES RAP
JAZZ
OFF
MUSIC
ROCK BLUES
RAP JAZZ
USER
1 2
3 4
100 350 1K 3.5K 10K
PROGRAM
PRO LOGIC HALL ARENA
3 STEREO
E-45
English
Adjusting the graphic equalizer
for your desired sound taste
The 5 band graphic equalizer allows you to adjust the level
for each frequency band.
* Make adjustment by monitoring the equalizer level
indicators on the display.
1 Play back a source. (For source playback, refer to the
sections beginning on page 17.)
2 Press the equalizer control or button once or
more to select the frequency band to which you will adjust
the level.
*The selected frequency band is shown on the display.
*The scale bar of the selected frequency band on the
graphic equalizer level indicators will flash.
3 Press the equalizer control or button once or
more to adjust the level.
4 In the same way, make adjustment for other frequency
band.
Note on Australia, China, Singapore and General models
only
If the KARAOKE (including L and R ONLY) program is
selected, cancel it or select another sound field program.
Turning the equalizer to “flat” (the
state with no equalization applied)
By one of the following methods, the settings of preset
graphic equalizer mode (MUSIC) and sound field program
(PROGRAM) are turned off and the equalizer pattern is
turned to “flat”.
• Press the FLAT button on the remote control transmitter.
* Pressing the FLAT button once more will restore the
state before the equalizer was turned to “flat”.
• Press the MUSIC button and the PROGRAM button on the
front panel at the same time.
* There is no way to restore the state before the equalizer
was turned to “flat”.
USING GRAPHIC EQUALIZER
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
100 350 1K 3.5K 10K
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
3
2
FLAT
E-46
The Sound Field Processor built into this system presents you with the ambience of an actual concert hall etc. by adding effects as
sonic reflections or reberverations that create the sound environment of a hall etc. This system provides preset sound field
programs shown below. You can enjoy an excellent audio sound field by selecting one of them, and adding desired adjustments.
This system incorporates a Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder for multi-channel sound reproduction of Dolby Surround encoded
video sources. The operation of the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder can be controlled by selecting a corresponding sound field
program.
USING SOUND FIELD PROCESSOR
Brief Overview of Sound Field Programs
PROGRAM
PRO LOGIC
3 STEREO
HALL
ARENA
KARAOKE
(KARAOKE L)
(KARAOKE R)
FEATURE
This program is used for playback of sources encoded with Dolby Surround.
Sounds are reproduced as movie creaters designed by using five speakers. You can experience the
dramatic realism and impact of a movie theater.
This program is effective not only for playback of sources encoded with Dolby Surround, but also for
sources not encoded with Dolby Surround or TV programs with 2-channel stereo sound. With this
program, 2-channel stereo sound is converted into 3-channels (left front, center and right front), so the
dialogs are emphasized on the center position by the use of the center speaker. As no sound is output
from the rear speakers, this program is also effective in a simple Audio/Video system without rear
speakers.
In this program, the center will appear to be deep behind the front speakers, creating an expansive
large hall ambience. Orchestra and opera music are suited for this sound field.
This program simulates the sound environment of a big hall with long reverberation time and many
reflections of high frequencies.
These programs are available on Australia, China, Singapore and General models only.
(Refer to page 51 for karaoke operation.)
* Programs on the shaded area are available on Australia, China, Singapore and General models only.
MUSIC
ROCK BLUES
RAP JAZZ
USER
1 2
3 4
PROGRAM
PRO LOGIC HALL ARENA
3 STEREO KARAOKE L R
E-47
English
Listening to the music with a
sound field effect
1 Play back a source. (For source playback, refer to the
sections beginning on page 17.)
2 Press the PROGRAM button once or more so that the
name of a desired program appears on the sound field
program indicator.
* Whenever you press the PROGRAM button, the
program changes and is displayed as follows.
* Programs on the shaded areas are available on Australia,
China, Singapore and General models only.
3 If desired, adjust the delay time and the output level of
each speaker. (For details, refer to the corresponding
descriptions on page 48–49.)
Notes
● When HALL or ARENA is selected, no sound is heard
from the center speaker.
● When a monaural sound source is played with DOLBY
PRO LOGIC or DOLBY 3 STEREO, no sound is heard
from the front speakers and the rear speakers. Sound is
heard only from the center speaker. For DOLBY PRO
LOGIC only, however, if the center channel mode is in
“PHANTOM”, the front speakers output the sound of the
center channel.
● A sound field effect is also be recorded along with a
source when recording on the built-in tape deck.
USING SOUND FIELD PROCESSOR
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
PROGRAM
PRO LOGIC HALL ARENA
3 STEREO KARAOKE L R
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
3
2
2
PRO LOGIC
3 STEREO HALL
KARAOKE
ARENA
OFF
KARAOKE L
(L ONLY)
KARAOKE R
(R ONLY)
Adjusting CENTER LEVEL
If desired, you can adjust the sound output level of the center
speaker even if the output level is already set in “SPEAKER
BALANCE ADJUSTMENT” on page 15–16.
Control range : +10 to –21
1 Press the CENTER/REAR/DELAY selector button once or
more so that “CENT” appears on the display.
2 By continuously pressing the LEVEL control + or – button,
the level value changes continuously.
Notes
● This adjustment can be made only when the sound field
program DOLBY PRO LOGIC or DOLBY 3 STEREO is
selected.
● Once the output level is adjusted, the level value will be
the same in the DOLBY PRO LOGIC and DOLBY 3
STEREO programs.
E-48
USING SOUND FIELD PROCESSOR
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
Adjusting REAR LEVEL
If desired, you can adjust the sound output level of the rear
speakers even if the output level is already set in “SPEAKER
BALANCE ADJUSTMENT” on page 15–16.
Control range : +10 to –21
1 Press the CENTER/REAR/DELAY selector button once or
more so that “REAR” appears on the display.
2 By continuously pressing the LEVEL control + or – button,
the level value changes continuously.
Notes
● This adjustment can be made when a sound field program
except DOLBY 3 STEREO is selected.
● Adjustment can be made to DOLBY PRO LOGIC, HALL
and ARENA individually.
2
1
E-49
English
USING SOUND FIELD PROCESSOR
Adjusting DELAY TIME
You can adjust the time difference between the beginning of
the source sound and the beginning of the effect sound.
This adjustment can be made to all programs (except DOLBY
3 STEREO) individually.
By applying more or less delay, sound effects, background
noise, and ambient noise coming at you from the rear
speakers can be enhanced or subdued for extra effect.
Control range
PRO LOGIC : 15, 20, 25, 30 milliseconds
HALL, ARENA : 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50 milliseconds
1 Press the CENTER/REAR/DELAY selector button once
or more so that “DEL” appears on the display.
2 By continuously pressing the LEVEL control + or – button,
the value changes continuously.
The value stops changing momentarily at the preset point.
Notes
● When DOLBY 3 STEREO is selected, this adjustment
cannot be made.
● Adding too much delay will cause an unnatural effect with
some sources.
● When the LEVEL control button is pressed, sound is
momentarily interrupted.
Note
The values of the delay time, center level and rear level you
set the last time will remain memorized even when the power
of this unit is off.
However, if the power cord is kept disconnected for more
than one week, these values will be automatically changed
back to the original factory settings.
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
2
1
Adjustable
E-50
Your favorite pair of any equalizer mode (or an equalizer
pattern of your own adjusting) and any sound field program
can be stored as a user program. Up to 4 pairs can be stored
as desired.
To store
1 Select a desired equalizer mode by pressing the MUSIC
button.
* If desired, adjust the equalizer as you prefer by using
the equalizer control buttons.
2 Select a desired sound field program by pressing the
PROGRAM button.
3 Press the user program MEMORY button.
* “1” will flash on the user program number indicator and
the MEMORY indicator will flash for about 5 seconds.
4 Select the user program number (1, 2, 3 or 4) to which
you will store the selected modes by pressing the USER
button once or more before “1” stops flashing.
* Whenever you press the USER button, the user
program number changes and is displayed as follows.
5 Press the user program MEMORY button before the
number selected in step 4 stops flashing.
* In the same way, store other pairs to other three user
positions.
* It is also a good idea to store only an equalizer pattern of
your own adjusting (without storing any sound field
program).
Notes
• A new program can be stored in place of the former one.
• In step 4 or 5, if the user program number indicator stops
flashing before operation, return to step 3.
To recall a user program
11 Play back a source. (For source playback, refer to the
sections beginning on page 17.)
22 Press the USER button once or more so that the user
program number you want to recall lights up.
* Whenever you press the USER button, the user
program number changes and is displayed as follows.
STORING YOUR OWN PROGRAMS
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
USER
1 2
3 4
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
2 1 1
4, 22 3, 5
1
4, 22
2
USER 1 USER 2 USER 3
USER 4
USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 USER 4
OFF
Feature
Medium frequencies of the source sound
(vocals etc.) are attenuated. This mode is
suitable for singing karaoke using a
normal audio source with vocals.
Note
There may be a case that vocals cannot
only be attenuated effectively according to
a source.
Only signals on the left channel of the
source are output from the left and right
speakers.
When using a karaoke source which
contains both background music and
original vocals on the right channel and
background music only on the left
channel, selecting this mode is suitable
for singing karaoke.
Only signals on the right channel of the
source are output from the left and right
speakers.
When using a karaoke source which
contains both background music and
original vocals on the left channel and
background music only on the right
channel, selecting this mode is suitable
for singing karaoke.
E-51
English
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
ECHOECHO
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
Active Servo
Technology
MIN MAX
MIC MIC MIXING
MIN MAX
MIC MIC MIXING
KARAOKE OPERATION (Australia, China, Singapore and General models only)
Singing karaoke
This system allows you to enjoy singing karaoke by using not
only a source for karaoke use but also any normal audio
source.
1 Connect one or two microphones to the MIC jack(s) on
the front panel.
2 Play back a source. (For source playback, refer to the
sections beginning on page 17.)
3 If necessary, select a karaoke mode (KARAOKE,
KARAOKE L or KARAOKE R) by pressing the
PROGRAM button once or more so that the
corresponding name appears on the sound field program
indicator.
For descriptions of the karaoke modes, see the list below.
4 Only when the KARAOKE (including L and R ONLY)
mode is selected, echo effect is automatically applied.
Adjust the echo effect level by pressing the ECHO or
button. If you need no echo effect, adjust the level to
minimum.
* On the remote control transmitter, pressing the LEVEL
control buttons adjusts the echo effect level.
5 While singing, adjust the mixing level of singing voice by
turning the MIC MIXING level control.
To cancel the karaoke mode
Press the PROGRAM button so that “KARAOKE”,
“KARAOKE L” or “KARAOKE R” disappears from the sound
field program indicator.
1
3
3
45
Karaoke modes (PROGRAM)
Mode
KARAOKE
(KARAOKE L)
(KARAOKE R)
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
4
E-52
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
HOW TO USE THE BUILT-IN TIMER
Timer play
By using the built-in timer, you can set the time when the unit
turns on and a source begins playing automatically, and the
time when the unit turns off automatically.
1 Prepare the source to be played.
For tuner:
Tune in to the station you will listen to.
For tape deck:
Load a tape into the cassette compartment.
(If tapes are loaded in both the compartments, tape 1
takes priority of tape 2, and is played back by the timer
play.)
For CD player:
Load a disc on the disc table. If more than one disc are
loaded on the disc table, select the disc by using the
DISC selector buttons or the DISC SKIP button.
2 Press the DISPLAY button.
Whenever the DISPLAY button is pressed, the display
mode changes as follows.
At each mode, make a setting for the timer play, referring
to the setting procedure described below.
➀ Current time (TIMER on/off mode)
➁ Source selecting mode (TAPE, TUNER, CD)
➂ ON TIME/Time setting mode
➃ OFF TIME/Time setting mode
➄ Normal display mode
* The display mode will be changed to the next mode
after about 8 seconds elapse automatically. If the mode
is changed before the setting is completed, call the
mode again by pressing the DISPLAY button once or
more.
Setting procedure:
➀ At the display of current time
Check to be sure that the current time is correct, and
press the TIMER button so that “TIMER” lights up on
the display.
➁ At source selecting mode
Select the source (TAPE, TUNER or CD) to be played
by pressing the corresponding input selector button.
* If “TUNER” is selected, soon it is changed to the
frequency display mode. In this mode, you can
select the station to listen to with the timer play by
using the PRESET/TUNING/BAND selector button,
A/B/C/D/E button and / buttons.
→
→→→→
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
2-➀ 22-➁
2-➁
2-➁
E-53
English
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
➂ At ON TIME/time setting mode
[“ON TIME” appears on the display, and soon it is
changed to a time setting mode.]
Set to the time when you want to begin the timer play
by using the HOUR button and the MIN button.
➃ At OFF TIME/time setting mode
[“OFF TIME” appears on the display, and soon it is
changed to a time setting mode.]
If necessary, set to the time when you want to finish
the timer play (to turn this unit off) by using the HOUR
button and the MIN button. Even if you do not set the
time, it has already been set so that the timer play
finishes after 1 hour.
* The TIMER button functions also in the time (ON
TIME or OFF TIME) setting mode. (However, it also
turns off the power.)
3 If you will not use this unit until the timer play begins, turn
the power off by pressing the POWER switch or the
TIMER button.
Note
If a timer play setting is made and the power is not turned off,
the source set for the timer play will begin playing when the
time comes in place of the source played at that time.
To cancel the timer play setting
After the timer play is finished, press the DISPLAY button to
call the current time. While the current time is displayed,
press the TIMER button so that “TIMER” goes out from the
display.
If it is not canceled, the system will be turned on at the same
time every day, so it can be used as an alarm. However, if
you are planning to go out at that time, cancel the timer play
setting.
* Unless the AC supply lead is unplugged or there is a
power failure for more than 5 minutes, the time set on the
timer will be retained until it is reset.
How to make time setting in the ON TIME or OFF
TIME mode
For the hour:
Press the HOUR button to change the hour to a higher value.
Press and hold to change continuously.
To change the hour to a lower value, press the button.
For the minute:
Use the MIN button and operate it in the same way as you
did to change the hour.
To change the minute to a lower value, press the
button.
HOW TO USE THE BUILT-IN TIMER
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
TIMERPOWER DISPLAY
HOUR
MIN
POWER
E-54
Timer recording
(To record a tuner program)
1 Load a blank tape into the deck 2 cassette compartment.
2 If desired, change the setting of the reverse mode and
use the Dolby NR system.
3 Tune in to the station of which program you want to
record.
4 Follow step 2 of the “Timer play” on page 52 and 53.
* In step
➁, select “TUNER” position, and then press the
TIMER REC button. (“REC” will flash on the display.)
* In step
➂, set the time when you want to begin the
timer recording.
* In step
➃, set the time when you want to finish the
timer recording.
5 Press the TIMER button.
(The power will be turned off automatically.)
* If a normal display mode (the state which had been
selected before you began setting the timer recording)
is restored before you press the TIMER button, select
and follow either of the two methods below.
•
Press the DISPLAY button, and then press the
TIMER button. (The power is still on.)
•
Press the POWER switch to turn the power off, and
then press the TIMER button. (The power is turned
off.)
To confirm the timer time setting
Press the DISPLAY button.
To cancel the setting of timer recording
Press the DISPLAY button once or more so that “REC”
flashes on the display. While “REC” is flashing, press the
TIMER REC button.
* Unless the AC supply lead is unplugged or there is a
power failure for more than 5 minutes, the time set on the
timer will be retained until it is reset.
Note
When the timer recording is finished, the timer setting is
automatically canceled to avoid repeating timer recording of
the same setting.
HOW TO USE THE BUILT-IN TIMER
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
12
TIMER REC
5
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
POWER DISPLAY
POWER
TUNER
E-55
English
HOW TO USE THE BUILT-IN TIMER
1
PLAYBACK
2
REC/PLAYBACK
EJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
DISC CHANGE
Active Servo
Technology
1
2
3
DISC
PROGRAM
USER
VOLUME
DOWN UP
MEMORY
DOWN UP
REC/PAUSE
MODE
HOUR MIN
NORMAL
DUBBING
HIGH
MEMORY
TIME ADJ
DOLBY NR
AUTO/MAN’L
TIMER
TIMER REC
MUSIC
POWER
PHONES
PRESET/TUNING/BAND
A/B/C/D/E
RANDOM
REPEAT
EDIT
DISPLAY
CD
INPUT INPUT
TAPE 1/2
START
MODE
FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT
PTY SEEK
EJECT
MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM
GX
–
70
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
TIME
A
DISC SKIP
PROG
B
TAPE
C
EDIT
D
+I0
E
OPEN
/
CLOSERANDOM
REPEATMODE
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 0
CD
PRESET
TUNER
TAPE
STOP
STOP
PLAY
/
PAUSE
PLAYPLAY
REC
/
PAUSE TAPE 1
/
2
LEVEL MUSIC
TEST FLAT
CENTER
/
REAR
/
DELAY
PROGRAM
USER
POWER
INPUTSLEEP
VOLUME
POWER
SLEEP
POWER
Sleep timer operation
This unit can be turned off automatically.
1 Play the desired sound source.
2 Press the SLEEP button. “SLEEP” appears on the display,
and soon it is replaced by “2h00m”.
3 Press the SLEEP button repeatedly until the desired sleep
time appears on the display. The display will change as
described below. [Time is displayed by the hour (h) and
the minute (m).]
* The original display mode will resume about 4 seconds
after the selection is made.
* The SLEEP indicator will light up to indicate that the
sleep timer is on.
4 The unit will turn off automatically when the selected sleep
time passes.
To confirm the sleep time setting
Press the SLEEP button once. “SLEEP” appears on the
display, and soon it is replaced by the remaining time of the
selected sleep time.
To change the sleep time
While the SLEEP indicator is being illuminated, press the
SLEEP button repeatedly until the desired time appears.
To stop the sleep timer operation
Press the POWER switch, or press the SLEEP button
repeatedly until “OFF SLEEP” appears on the display.
(The SLEEP indicator will go out.)
Using the timer and the sleep
timer at the same time
1 Prepare timer play. (See page 52 and 53.)
* Do not turn the power of this unit off after the timer
setting is finished.
2 Press the SLEEP button and set the sleep time.
When the sleep timer operation finishes, the timer begins
functioning to turn the source on at the preset time.
Note
Do not make the timer time setting so that the timer will start
during sleep timer operation. (Since sleep timer operation
has priority, the timer will not operate.)
OFF SLEEP
(Sleep timer is off.)
2h00m 1h30m 1h00m 0h30m
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
E-56
Internal care
•
Dirty heads, capstans and pinch rollers can cause poor
sound and tape jams.
Clean these parts with a cotton swab moistened with
commercially available head/pinch roller cleaner or
isopropyl alcohol, or with a commercially available
cleaning tape.
•
After long use, the deck’s heads and capstans may
become magnetized, causing poor sound. Demagnetize
these parts once every 30 hours of playing/recording time
by using a commercially available tape head
demagnetizer. Read the demagnetizer’s instructions
carefully before use.
External care
•
Periodically clean the surfaces of this system, especially
the top panel of the main unit to prevent the ventilation
holes from being blocked with dust etc.
•
Do not use chemically treated cleaning cloths or other
chemicals. (See “Precautions”.)
MAINTENANCE
Deck 1
Deck 2
TROUBLESHOOTING
If your unit fails to operate normally, check the following points to determine whether the fault can be corrected by the simple
measures suggested. If it cannot, or if the fault is not listed in the SYMPTOM column, disconnect the power cord and contact your
authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for help.
CAUSE
AC supply lead is not plugged in.
Loose speaker connections.
Internal protection circuit is functioning.
One rear speaker connection is loose or bad.
The sound output level to the rear speakers is
set to minimum.
No sound field program is selected.
The sound output level to the center speaker is
set to minimum.
The center channel mode is in PHANTOM
mode.
Incorrect sound field program selection.
No sound field program is selected.
Incorrect cord connections.
Input source selection is not proper.
SYMPTOM
No power even if the POWER switch is
pressed.
No sound from one speaker
No sound from speakers.
No sound from the rear speakers.
No sound from the center speaker.
No sound (or no picture) from an external
unit connected with this system.
REMEDY
Plug in the AC supply lead.
Connect properly.
Unplug the AC supply lead from the wall AC outlet, and then
plug in again.
Connect it properly.
Raise the sound output level to the rear speakers.
Select the appropriate program.
Raise the sound output level to the center speaker.
Select NORMAL mode.
Select the appropriate program.
Connect the cords properly. If the problem persists, the
cords may be defective.
Make a proper input source selection.
AMPLIFIER/TUNER
E-57
English
CAUSE
Interference from starting motor of nearby car.
Interference from thermostat of nearby electrical
appliance.
Antenna input is too weak due to obstructions or
excessive distance from broadcasting station.
Insufficient antenna input.
Preset memory has been erased.
Interference from source such as lightning,
flourescent lights, electric motors or thermostat
of nearby electrical appliance.
TV or microprocessor is being used nearby.
Radio signal is weak or antenna is not properly
connected.
Current time is not set.
The internal microcomputer has been frozen by
an external electric shock (lightning, excessive
static electricity, etc.) or power supply with low
voltage.
Disc is upside down.
Disc is dirty.
Input selector setting is incorrect.
Disc is dirty.
Volume is set too high.
Slack tape wrapped around pinch roller.
Erasure prevention tab is broken off.
Head is dirty.
Head is dirty.
Head has become magnetized.
Tape is worn.
Tape encoded with Dolby NR is played back
with this unit’s Dolby NR system off.
Head is dirty.
Head is dirty.
Head has become magnetized.
Tape is worn.
Slack tape coming out of cassette shell.
Tape is creased or torn.
Endless tape is being used.
Silent gaps between selections are too short.
Excessively soft passages in middle of
selections.
Conversation etc. is recorded.
Batteries are dead.
Remote control is too far away or is being used
at incorrect angle.
Direct sunlight or lighting (of an inverter type of
flourescent lamp etc.) is striking the remote
control sensor of the main unit.
Remote control is being used near TV set with a
remote control sensor.
SYMPTOM
Excessive static in FM broadcasts.
Noise increases during stereo broadcasts.
Stereo broadcasts are noisy and STEREO
indicator blinks on and off.
Cannot select preset stations.
Buzzing or static during AM (LW or MW)
broadcasts.
AM (LW or MW) broadcast sensitivity is poor.
Can’t set timer.
This unit will not operate properly.
Playback will not begin even if disc is loaded.
No sound.
Sound stops suddenly (always at same spot).
Tape won’t move during playback or
recording.
Can’t record.
Sound is distorted or fades out.
Poor sound quality.
Stereo balance is poor.
Excessive noise.
Tape travel stops in middle of playback or
recording.
Can’t find the beginning of desired selections
on tape.
Remote control doesn’t work.
TV functions strangely when the remote
control is used.
TROUBLESHOOTING
REMEDY
Position the FM antenna as high and as far away from
nearby roads as possible. Connect using a coaxial cable.
Check antenna connections.
Install a multi-element type FM antenna if possible.
Install an antenna appropriate for the electric field strength of
your area.
Reprogram memory presets.
Problem is difficult to eliminate but can be lessened by
grounding MW/LW (AM) loop antenna.
Move away from TV or microprocessor.
Properly connect MW/LW (AM) loop antenna.
Change orientation of MW/LW (AM) loop antenna.
Install an external MW/LW (AM) antenna.
Set current time.
Unplug the AC supply lead from the wall AC outlet, and then
plug in again after about one minute.
Load disc label side up.
Clean disc.
Press the CD input selector button.
Clean disc.
Lower volume.
Take up slack with a pencil before using.
Replace tape or cover erasure prevention hole with
cellophane tape.
Clean heads.
Clean heads.
Demagnetize heads with head eraser.
Replace tape.
Press the Dolby NR button to turn it on.
Clean heads.
Clean heads.
Demagnetize heads with head eraser.
Replace tape.
Take up slack by turning reels with a pencil.
Replace with new tape.
Don’t use endless tapes.
The function of searching for the beginning of desired
selections won’t operate unless the silent gaps between
selections are at least four seconds long.
Replace batteries.
Use within 6 m and 60° radius.
Change position of the main unit.
Relocate this unit away from the TV or cover TV’s remote
control sensor.
AMPLIFIER/TUNERCD PLAYER
REMOTE CONTROL
TAPE DECK
E-58
SPECIFICATIONS
As a part of policy of continuous improvement, YAMAHA reserves the right to make design and specification changes for
product improvement without prior notice. The performance specification figures indicated are nominal values of production
units.
■ Amplifier section
Minimum RMS Output Power per Channel
Front L, R
6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1% THD ............................................. 65W+65W
6 ohms, 1 kHz, 10% THD
[U.S.A., Canada, China, Singapore
and General models only] ...................................... 75W+75W
Center
6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1% THD ....................................................... 20W
Rear
6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1% THD ....................................................... 20W
DIN Standard Output Power per Channel [Europe model only]
6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1% THD .......................................................... 65W
IEC Power [Europe model only]
6 ohms, 1 kHz, 0.1% THD ....................................................... 50W
Input Sensitivity/Impedance
MD/AUX ............................................................ 300 mV/23 k-ohms
Mic Input Sensitivity/Impedance
MIC ................................................................... 0.5 mV/4.7 k-ohms
Headphone Output Impedance.......................................... 68 ohms
Total Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
MD/AUX to SP OUT (32.5W/6 ohms)................................... 0.08%
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
MD/AUX (Input Shorted)
[U.S.A., Canada, Europe and U.K. models] ..................... 85 dB
[Australia, China, Singapore and General models]
............................................................................................. 75 dB
Graphic Equalizer Characteristics
(100 Hz, 350 Hz, 1 kHz, 3.5 kHz, 10 kHz) ........................... ±10 dB
■ Video section
Video Signal Level .................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 ohms
Maximum Input Level............................................ 1.5 Vp-p or more
Signal-to-Noise Ratio ................................................ 50 dB or more
Monitor Out Frequency Response ..............5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB
■ Tuner section
Tuning Range
FM
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[U.K., Europe, Australia, China, Singapore
and General models]........................................ 87.5 to 108.0 MHz
AM (MW)
[
U.S.A., Canada and General models]
............................................................................ 530 – 1,710 kHz
[
U.K., Europe, Australia, China and Singapore models]
............................................................................ 531 – 1,611 kHz
LW
[
U.K. and Europe models only]........................... 153 – 288 kHz
Usable Sensitivity
FM (75 ohms)
(30 dB S/N Quieting, 1 kHz, 100% mod.)
[
U.S.A., Canada, China, Singapore and General models]
..........................................................................1.5 µV (14.8 dBf)
(DIN, Mono, S/N 26 dB)
[
U.K., Europe and Australia models] .............................1.8 µV
AM (MW) .......................................................................... 280 µV/m
LW [U.K. and Europe models only]............................... 560 µV/m
■ CD player section
Type ................................................. 3 DISC Carousel Auto-changer
Signal Readout
........................... Non-contact, 3-beam semi-conductor laser pick-up
D/A Converter ................................................................... 1-bit DAC
Filter ................................................8-time oversampling digital filter
Wow and Flutter .........................................Below measurable limits
■ Tape deck section
Type ............................. Auto Reverse stereo double Cassette Deck
Deck 1: Playback only
Deck 2: Playback/Recording
Heads ................................................ PB, REC/PB : Hard Permalloy
Erase : Double Gap Ferrite
Motors ................................................................ DC servo motor x 2
Wow and Flutter ................................................. 50.19%, W.PEAK
0.09%, W.RMS
Fast Winding Time (C-60 Tape) ........................ About 110 seconds
Frequency Response (–20 dB)
Type l (Normal)........................................... 30 – 15,000 Hz 53 dB
Type ll (High).............................................. 30 – 16,000 Hz 53 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio .................................. 58 dB (Dolby NR OFF)
66 dB (Dolby B NR ON)
Harmonic Distortion.......................................... No more than 0.8%
Channel Separation (Input Shorted 1 kHz)
................................................................................. More than 40 dB
Crosstalk (Input Shorted 125 Hz).......................... More than 55 dB
E-59
English
SPECIFICATIONS
■ Speaker section
Type
Front .................. 3-Way Active Servo Processing Speaker System
(Magnetic-Shielding Type)
Center................................................. Full Range Speaker System
(Magnetic-Shielding Type)
Rear .................................................... Full Range Speaker System
Speakers
Front.............................................................. 13 cm (5-1/8”) woofer
5 cm (1-15/16”) tweeter
2 cm (13/16”) super tweeter
Center.......................................... 9 cm (3-9/16”) full range speaker
Rear............................................... 8 cm (3-1/8”) full range speaker
Frequency Range
Front........................................................................ 60 – 20,000 Hz
Center ................................................................... 100 – 20,000 Hz
Rear....................................................................... 110 – 20,000 Hz
Sound Pressure Level
Front.................................................................................... 87.0 dB
Center ................................................................................. 85.0 dB
Rear..................................................................................... 85.0 dB
Maximum Power Handling Capacity
Front......................................................................................... 90W
Center ...................................................................................... 27W
Rear....................................................................................... 13.5W
Impedance
Front .................................................................................... 6 ohms
Center.................................................................................. 8 ohms
Rear ..................................................................................... 4 ohms
■ General
Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120V, 60 Hz
[U.K., Europe
and Singapore
models] ............... AC 230V, 50 Hz
[Australia model] ................................................. AC 240V, 50 Hz
[China model] ...................................................... AC 220V, 50 Hz
[General model] ......................... AC 110/120/220/240V, 60/50 Hz
Power consumption ............................................................... 190W
Dimensions (W x H x D)
GX-70 ............................................................. 280 x 320 x 360 mm
(11” x 12-5/8” x 14-3/16”)
NX-GX70 ........................................................ 200 x 320 x 243 mm
(7-7/8” x 12-5/8” x 9-9/16”)
NX-C70 ........................................................... 280 x 123 x 140 mm
(11” x 4-13/16” x 5-1/2”)
NX-E70 ........................................................... 200 x 115 x 105 mm
(7-7/8” x 4-1/2” x 4-1/8”)
Weight
GX-70 ......................................................... 10.8 kg (23 lbs. 12 oz.)
NX-GX70 .................................................. 3.5 kg (7 lbs. 11 oz.) x 2
NX-C70 ............................................................. 1.5 kg (3 lbs. 5 oz.)
NX-E70 ..................................................... 0.8 kg (1 lbs. 12 oz.) x 2
VV18180
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
Printed in Malaysia
Transcripción de documentos
Active Servo Technology DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 GX–7 OPEN/CLOSE 1 PTY SEE K Y LA DISP T STAR 2 DISC IT ED DE 3 MO FRE PROGRAM PRESET/TUNINGBAND MUSIC Q PS/P TY/R RAND T/CT REPE AT OM VOLUME A/B/C/D/E CD DOWN INPUT MEMORY UP TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE MODE NORMAL HIGH DOLBY NR POWER UP INPUT DOWN USER DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR PLAYBACK MIN 1 2 REC/PLAYBACK DOLBY B NR EJECT EJECT Active Servo Active Servo Technology Technology Natural Sound Mini Component System Chaîne Mini de la série “Natural Sound” OWNER‘S MANUAL MODE D‘EMPLOI SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 7 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. 8 Ventilation – The unit should be situated so that its location or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation. For example, the unit should not be situated on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface, that may block the ventilation openings; or placed in a built-in installation, such as a bookcase or cabinet that may impede the flow of air through the ventilation openings. 9 Heat – The unit should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, stoves, or other appliances that produce heat. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. 10 Power Sources – The unit should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on the unit. 11 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the unit. 12 Cleaning – The unit should be cleaned only as recommended by the manufacturer. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. 1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the unit is operated. 2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. 3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the unit and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. 4 Follow Instructions – All operating and other instructions should be followed. 5 Water and Moisture – The unit should not be used near water – for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, etc. 6 13 Nonuse Periods – The power cord of the unit should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time. 14 Object and Liquid Entry – Care should be taken so that objects do not fall into and liquids are not spilled into the inside of the unit. 15 Damage Requiring Service – The unit should be serviced by qualified service personnel when: A. The power-supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the unit; or C. The unit has been exposed to rain; or D. The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance; or E. The unit has been dropped, or the cabinet damaged. 16 Servicing – The user should not attempt to service the unit beyond those means described in the operating instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. Carts and Stands – The unit should be used only with a cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. 17 Power Lines – An outdoor antenna should be located 6A A unit and cart combination should be away from power lines. moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the unit and cart combination to overturn. 18 Grounding or Polarization – Precautions should be taken so that the grounding or polarization is not defeated. 2 19 For US customers only: EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna is connected to this unit, be sure the antenna system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE SPECIAL NOTES FOR FCC COMPOSITE DEVICE (for US customers only) This device is a composite system. The digital device component may not cause harmful interference. FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only) Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime (for US customers only) YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. 3 SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES ACCESSOIRES FOURNIS ● ● Remote control transmitter Télécommande After unpacking, check that the following parts are contained. Après le déballage, vérifier que les pièces suivantes sont incluses. ● ● ● 1 2 CD 3 4 4 1 2 3 6 7 8 6 7 A B TIME PROG MODE REPEAT 8 REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 TEST LEVEL 5 Speaker cords Câbles d’enceintes PRESET 9 0 C D E TAPE EDIT +I0 RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER DISC SKIP CENTER/REAR /DELAY ● 5 PLAY FLAT MUSIC STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY TAPE PROGRAM USER POWER SLEEP INPUT VOLUME ● ● Batteries (size AA, UM/SUM-3, R6, HP-7) Piles (format AA, UM/SUM-3, R6, HP-7) ● ● ● ● ● AM (MW/LW) loop antenna Cadre-antenne AM (PO/GO) ● ● ● ● ● Indoor FM antenna Antenne intérieure FM 4 Pads Patins Screws Vis Mounting brackets Supports de montage 1 1 345 67 89= A B 2 TAPE 1 PROGRAM USER NOR TEST PRO LOGIC HALL ARENA 1 2 PHANTOM 3 4 TIMER SLEEP 3 STEREO MUSIC ROCK BLUES RAP JAZZ C STEREO TUNED MEMORY AUTO PTY HOLD PRESET 100 350 VOLUME MHz 1K 3.5K 10K D E F 2 1 DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE 3 1 K PTY SEE AY RT 2 DIS C 4 5 6 STA M T/CT EAT TY/R REP PS/P FREQ DOM RAN PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING /BAND MUSIC CD INPUT TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE NORMAL MODE J HIGH DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC AUTO/MAN’L 8 L K UP MEMORY DOLBY NR POWER UP INPUT DOWN 7 VOLUME A/B/C/D/E DOWN USER PL DIS IT ED ODE 3 P O N M MEMORY Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR MIN PLAYBACK 1 2 REC/PLAYBACK Active Servo Technology MIC MIC MIXING MIN H EJECT 9 0A B C EJECT DE F Illustration: Europe model Illustration: Modèle pour l’Europe 5 G MAX I 2 MUSIC ROCK PROGRAM TAPE 1 USER J H I G RANDOM 1 2 3 4 5 6 ARENA 7 8 9 10 11 12 TOTAL REM 13 14 15 OVER 15 TRACK 100 350 EDIT PROG A B S F REP 1K 3.5K 10K K MNO PQ L S VOLUME T U V DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE R Q 1 K PTY SEE AY RT 2 DIS C STA IT ED ODE 3 M T/CT EAT TY/R REP PS/P FREQ DOM RAN PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC VOLUME Z A/B/C/D/E CD DOWN INPUT MEMORY UP TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE NORMAL MODE HIGH DOLBY NR POWER UP INPUT DOWN USER PL DIS W X Y DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC AUTO/MAN’L MEMORY Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR PLAYBACK MIN 1 2 REC/PLAYBACK EJECT EJECT Illustration: Europe model Illustration: Modèle pour l’Europe 6 3 R S T U VW MUSIC ROCK 100 350 PROGRAM DUBBING REC TAPE 1 2 NOR HIGH USER ARENA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 B 13 14 15 OVER 15 VOLUME 1K 3.5K 10K Y X DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE 1 K PTY SEE AY RT 2 DIS C STA 3 T/CT EAT TY/R REP PS/P FREQ DOM RAN PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC VOLUME A/B/C/D/E CD DOWN [ \ INPUT UP MEMORY TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE h g NORMAL MODE HIGH DOLBY NR POWER UP INPUT DOWN USER PL DIS IT ED DE MO DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC AUTO/MAN’L MEMORY Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR PLAYBACK MIN 1 2 REC/PLAYBACK ] f EJECT ^ EJECT a b c Illustration: Europe model Illustration: Modèle pour l’Europe 7 d e 4 Front speakers Enceintes avant , , , , , , , , , ,,,,,,,,,,, ,,,,,,,,,,, ,,,,,,,,,,, NX-GX70 Active Servo Active Servo Technology Technology i NX-C70 Center speaker Enceinte centrale NX-E70 Rear speakers Enceintes arrière j j 8 1 5 2 3 4 1 2 CD 3 1 2 3 6 7 8 6 7 8 7 4 4 5 9 0 A B C D E PROG TAPE EDIT +I0 MODE REPEAT RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER DISC SKIP CENTER/REAR /DELAY TEST LEVEL PLAY FLAT MUSIC 2 CD 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 5 5 PRESET 6 7 8 9 0 A B C D E TAPE EDIT +I0 S 5 PRESET TIME REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 5 6 G 1 STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY TAPE PROGRAM USER F H E I D C B J TIME PROG MODE REPEAT RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER STOP DISC SKIP K L M PLAY/PAUSE N O P R Q A POWER SLEEP INPUT VOLUME 8 0 U V W X 9 PLAY REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 T CENTER/REAR /DELAY TEST STOP TAPE FLAT LEVEL PLAY Y MUSIC PROGRAM USER POWER SLEEP INPUT VOLUME 6 7 DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE 1 PTY SEEK T STAR 2 DISC MODE /RT/CT FREQ PS/PTY REPE AT OM RAND PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC VOLUME A/B/C/D/E CD DOWN INPUT MEMORY UP TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE MODE 2 NORMAL HIGH DOLBY NR POWER UP INPUT DOWN USER DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR PLAYBACK 1 MIN 1 2 REC/PLAYBACK Active Servo Active Servo Technology Technology 30° 9 0.2 m – 6 m (8” – 20’) EJECT EJECT 3 LAY DISP EDIT 3 PROGRAM 30° 8 POWER HIGH CUT 40 Hz VOLUME 140 Hz 0 10 Center speaker Enceinte centrale Subwoofer system Subwoofer de Traitement SPEAKERS CENTER/REAR REAR R SUBWOOFER CENTER R L L REAR VIDEO SIGNAL OUT MONITOR OUT DO NOT CONNECT THIS UNIT TO SPEAKERS OTHER THAN NX-C70 (CENTER) OR NX-E70 (REAR). OUT VCR IN Rear speakers LD/TV Enceintes arrière OUT MD/AUX R L IN R SINCE THIS UNIT HAS AN ACTIVE SERVO CIRCUIT BUILT–IN. DO NOT CONNECT IT TO SPEAKERS OTHER THAN NX–GX70. L AUDIO SIGNAL FRONT SPEAKERS L R Front speakers Enceintes avant 10 9 Monitor TV Moniteur TV VIDEO IN AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT LD player etc. Lecteur de disque laser, etc. SUBWOOFER VIDEO SIGNAL MONITOR OUT OUT VIDEO IN OUT AUDIO IN VCR VIDEO OUT IN AUDIO OUT LD/TV OUT Video cassette recorder Magnétoscope MD/AUX IN R L LINE OUT LINE IN AUDIO SIGNAL ANTENNA FM GND AM 75Ω UNBAL. SPEAKERS CENTER/REAR CENTER MODE NORMAL PHANTOM REAR R SUBWOOFER L REAR VIDEO SIGNAL OUT DAT, MD recorder, etc. Enregistreur de DAT, MD, etc CENTER MONITOR OUT OUT DO NOT CONNECT THIS UNIT TO SPEAKERS OTHER THAN NX-C70 (CENTER) OR NX-E70 (REAR). VCR IN LD/TV OUT MD/AUX R L IN R SINCE THIS UNIT HAS AN ACTIVE SERVO CIRCUIT BUILT–IN. DO NOT CONNECT IT TO SPEAKERS OTHER THAN NX–GX70. L AUDIO SIGNAL FRONT SPEAKERS 11 @ C DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE 1 SEEK PTY T 2 DISC ANTENNA STAR 3 /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FM GND FRE PROGRAM AM RA PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC 75Ω UNBAL. MO USER AY VOLUME A/B/C/D/E DOWN INPUT NORMAL PL AT CD UP INPUT DOWN SPEAKERS CENTER/REAR CENTER MODE DIS IT ED DE REPE NDOM UP MEMORY TAPE 1/2 PHANTOM REAR R CENTER REC/PAUSE L REAR NORMAL MODE HIGH DOLBY NR POWER DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC AUTO/MAN’L SUBWOOFER MEMORY Active Servo VIDEO SIGNAL Technology TIMER MONITOR OUT OUT TIME ADJ HOUR OUT MIN DO NOT CONNECT THIS UNIT TO SPEAKERS OTHER THAN NX-C70 (CENTER) OR NX-E70 (REAR). VCR PLAYBACK 1 2 REC/PLAYBACK IN LD/TV OUT MD/AUX R L IN R SINCE THIS UNIT HAS AN ACTIVE SERVO CIRCUIT BUILT–IN. DO NOT CONNECT IT TO SPEAKERS OTHER THAN NX–GX70. L AUDIO SIGNAL FRONT SPEAKERS EJECT EJECT To AC outlet Vers la prise c.a. PLAY REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 A CENTER/REAR /DELAY TEST FLAT LEVEL MUSIC STOP PLAY TAPE PROGRAM USER POWER SLEEP INPUT VOLUME D 1 AY PL DIS 2 B MEMORY HOUR PHONES TIME ADJ Changes. Change verändert sich Ändras Cambia Cambia Verandert. DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE 1 PTY SEEK 2 DISC STAR RAND PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC T ED DE MO AT T/CT TY/R REPE Q PS/P FRE OM 3 PROGRAM Y 3 A/B/C/D/E DOWN USER LA VOLUME CD INPUT MEMORY UP INPUT DOWN UP TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE MODE MEMORY NORMAL HIGH DOLBY NR POWER DISP IT DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L MIN Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR MIN TIME ADJ PLAYBACK EJECT 1 2 REC/PLAYBACK Changes. Change verändert sich Ändras Cambia Cambia Verandert. EJECT 12 ENGLISH English INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing this YAMAHA product. We hope it will give you many years of trouble-free enjoyment. For the best performance, read this manual carefully. It will guide you in operating your YAMAHA product. CONTENTS Page Page PRECAUTIONS ..................................................................2-3 RECEIVING RDS STATIONS FEATURES.........................................................................4-5 (U.K. and Europe models only)....................................27-30 NAMES OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS....................6-7 TAPE DECK OPERATION ............................................31-34 REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER ...............................7-8 RECORDING COMPACT DISCS ...................................35-40 SETTING UP THE MAIN UNIT ..............................................8 OTHER RECORDINGS ..................................................41-42 SETTING UP THE SPEAKERS........................................9-11 OPERATING EXTERNAL UNITS CONNECTED WITH THIS SYSTEM ...................................43 CONNECTIONS..............................................................11-13 USING GRAPHIC EQUALIZER .....................................44-45 REMOVING THE FRONT GRILLES OF FRONT SPEAKERS..........................................................................13 USING SOUND FIELD PROCESSOR ...........................46-49 LISTENING WITH HEADPHONES......................................13 STORING YOUR OWN PROGRAMS..................................50 TURNING THE POWER ON/OFF TO THIS SYSTEM.........13 KARAOKE OPERATION (Australia, China, Singapore and General models only) .................................................51 SETTING THE CLOCK........................................................14 HOW TO USE THE BUILT-IN TIMER ............................52-55 ADJUSTING BRIGHTNESS OF THE DISPLAY .................14 MAINTENANCE...................................................................56 VOLUME CONTROL ...........................................................14 TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................56-57 SPEAKER BALANCE ADJUSTMENT...........................15-16 SPECIFICATIONS ..........................................................58-59 COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION ......................17-23 TUNING OPERATION ....................................................24-26 For basic source play, the following illustrations on top of pages will help you to look for the section you need. ......CD playback ......Tape playback/recording E-1 ......Tuning PRECAUTIONS: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT ■ This system is designed for using the provided Active Servo Processing Speaker System for front speakers. Therefore, do not attempt to connect other conventional speakers to the FRONT SPEAKERS terminals of this system. ■ Although the cassette deck’s record/playback heads used in this unit are high quality heads with outstanding reproduction characteristics, they can become dirty through the use of old tapes or from dust accumulation over time. This can have a serious effect on reproduction quality. Clean the heads regularly with one of the commonly available head cleaners or with cleaning solutions. ■ Choose the installation location of this unit carefully. Avoid placing it in direct sunlight or close to a source of heat. Also avoid locations subject to vibration and excessive dust, heat, cold or moisture. Keep it away from sources of hum such as transformers and electric motors. ■ The voltage to be used must be the same as that specified on this unit. Using this unit with a higher voltage than that which is specified is dangerous and may result in a fire or other type of accident causing damage. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than that which is specified. ■ Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. ■ Never open the cabinet. If something drops into the set, contact your dealer. ■ The sound level at a given volume setting depends on speaker location and other factors. Care should be taken to avoid exposure to sudden high levels of sound, which may occur when turning on the unit with the volume control setting at high, and to continuous high levels of sound. ■ Always set the VOLUME control to minimum before starting an audio source play: increase the volume gradually to an appropriate level after play has started. ■ Sudden temperature changes and storage or operation in an extremely humid environment may cause condensation inside the cabinet. Condensation can cause the unit to malfunction. To eliminate condensation: ■ Do not use force on switches, controls or connection wires. When moving the unit, first disconnect the power plug and the wires connected to other equipment. Never pull the wire itself. ■ Do not attempt to clean the unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. • • ■ Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section regarding common operating errors before concluding that the unit is faulty. ■ To prevent lightning damage, disconnect the AC power plug and the antenna cable when there is an electrical storm. • ■ Do not plug the AC power plug to the wall socket before you finish all connections. ■ Never allow metallic items (e.g. screwdrivers, tools, etc.) to come near the cassette deck’s record/playback head assembly in this unit. Doing so may not only scratch or damage the head’s mirrorsmooth finish, it may change the magnetic characteristics of the heads, causing a deterioration in reproduction performance quality. E-2 CD pickup Leave the power on with no disc in the unit until normal playback is possible (about 1 hour). Tape head Leave the power on with no tape in the unit until normal playback is possible (about 1 hour). Note If condensation forms on the tape head, foreign matter may accumulate during use. Remote control Wipe off condensation on the transmitter window with a soft cloth before operating the unit. WARNING IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. DANGER Invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam. Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. As the laser beam used in this unit is harmful to the eyes, do not attempt to disassemble the cabinet. Refer servicing to qualified personnel only. CAUTION (FOR CANADA MODEL) TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT AND FULLY INSERT. To avoid electrical shock, do not open the cabinet. Refer servicing to qualified personnel only. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMER THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS MEETS ALL REQUIREMENTS OF THE CANADIAN INTERFERENCE-CAUSING EQUIPMENT REGULATIONS. DANGER: The use of optical instrument with this product will increase eye hazard. Laser Diode Properties Material: GaAlAs Wavelength: 780nm Emission Duration: continuous Laser Output: max. 44.6µW* * This output is the value measured at a distance of about 200mm from the objective lens surface on the Optical Pick-up Block. • • • • NOTE Please check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, compact discs, radio, etc. Recording of copyright material may infringe copyright laws. The apparatus is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if the apparatus itself is turned off. CAUTION FOR CARRYING THIS UNIT Be sure not to carry or tip this unit with discs remaining in it. CAUTION FOR MOVING THIS UNIT Before moving this unit, first remove all discs from the disc table and close the table by pressing the OPEN/CLOSE button. After you confirm that “NO DISC” lights up on the display, switch off the power by pressing the POWER switch, and then disconnect the power plug from the AC outlet. E-3 English PRECAUTIONS: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT FEATURES The System Compact Disc Player ● 5 Speaker Multi-Channel Audio System Including Two Front Speakers, One Center Speaker and Two Rear Speakers ● 3-Disc Carousel Type CD Changer ● Active Servo Processing Front Speaker System (NX-GX70) ● PLAYXCHANGE; Disc Changing Capability while Playing Back Another ● Free-Standing/Wall Mounting Type Rear Speaker System (NX-E70) ● 20-Track Random Access Programmable CD Playback ● Remote Control Capability ● Single Track/Entire Disc/All Disc Repeat Play ● CD Window to Make CD Playback Visible from Outside ● Random-sequence Play Amplifier ● Automatic Synchronized Recording with CD Playback ● Minimum RMS Output Power per Channel ● Automatic CD Editing Function for Recording to Tape Front L, R: 65W + 65W (6Ω) RMS Output Power, 1% THD, 1 kHz Center: Rear: Tape Deck 20W (6Ω) RMS Output Power, 1% THD, 1 kHz ● Double Cassette Tape Deck with Automatic Reversing Function 20W (6Ω) RMS Output Power, 1% THD, 1 kHz ● 2-Speed Tape Dubbing ● Adjustable Display Brightness ● Dolby B Type Noise Reduction System ● 2 Microphone Jacks and Mic Mixing Level Control for Karaoke (Australia, China, Singapore and General Models Only) Tuner ● 40 Station Random Access Preset Tuning ● Multi-Use Timer/Sleep Timer ● Automatic Power-Off Function ● 40 Station Automatic Preset Tuning ● 4 External Audio/Video Component Connecting Capability ● Multi-Functions for RDS Broadcast Reception (Europe and U.K. models only) ● SUBWOOFER Output Terminal Which Passes Low Frequencies Only E-4 Sound Field Processor Including Dolby Pro Logic Surround Decoder Graphic Equalizer ● 5-Band Adjustable Graphic Equalizer ● 2 Programs for Dolby Surround Decoding (DOLBY PRO LOGIC and DOLBY 3 STEREO) 2 Programs for Sound Field Processing (HALL and ARENA) [3-Karaoke Modes for Australia, China, Singapore and General Models Only] ● 4 Preset Graphic Equalizer Modes Selectable According to the Music Source (ROCK, BLUES, RAP and JAZZ) ● 4-Sound Field and 4-Equalizer Control Mode Storing Capability ● Automatic Input Balance Control for Dolby Pro Logic Surround ● 2 Center Channel Modes (NORMAL/PHANTOM) ● Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance Adjustment Dolby Pro Logic Surround Dolby Surround is encoded on the sound track of prerecorded video tapes, laser discs, and some TV/cable broadcasts. When you play a source encoded with Dolby Surround on this unit, the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder decodes the signal and distributes the surround-sound effects. In addition, this unit features a built-in automatic input balance control. This always assures you the best performance without manual adjustment. This unit employs a Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder similar to professional Dolby Stereo decoders used in many movie theaters. By using the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, you can experience the dramatic realism and impact of Dolby Surround movie theater sound in your own home. Dolby Pro Logic employs a four channel five speaker system. The Pro Logic Surround system divides the input signal into four levels: the left and right main channels, the center channel (used for dialog), and the rear surround sound channels (used for sound effects, background noise, and other ambient noises). The center channel allows listeners seated in even less-than-ideal positions to hear the dialog originating from the action on the screen while experiencing good stereo imaging. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “Dolby”, the double-D symbol and “Pro Logic” are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. E-5 English FEATURES NAMES OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS For amplifier/tuner (See figure 1 on page 5 at the beginning part of this manual.) 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 * 2 PRESET/TUNING/BAND Selector Button * 7 8 9 0 A B C D E F G H I J K (Down)/ DISPLAY Button PTY SEEK START Button PTY SEEK MODE Button FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT Selector Button PROGRAM Selector Button Display MUSIC Button 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 @ A B C D E F Equalizer Control Buttons USER Button POWER Switch PHONES Jack User Program MEMORY Button AUTO/MAN’L (TIMER) Button CD Input Selector Button TAPE 1/2 Input Selector Button HOUR Button MIN Button 2 * TIMER REC Button INPUT Selector Buttons MIC (Microphone) Jacks MIC MIXING (Microphone Mixing) Level Control Tuner MEMORY (TIME ADJUST) Button Preset Equalizer Mode Indicator (MUSIC) Sound Field Program Indicator (PROGRAM) User Program Number Indicator Center Channel Mode (NOR/PHANTOM) Indicator TEST Indicator TIMER Set Indicator SLEEP Indicator AUTO Tuning Indicator TUNED Indicator STEREO Indicator MEMORY Indicator PTY HOLD Indicator Volume Level Meter Graphic Equalizer Level Indicators Preset Number Indicator Multi Information Display (Time, Station Frequency, Volume Level, etc.) VOLUME Control For CD player Display (See figure 2 on page 6 at the beginning part of this manual.) G H I J K L M N O P Q Q R S T U V W X Y Z 1 DISC Selector Buttons Disc Table Stop Button: Play/Pause Button: / DISC CHANGE Button OPEN/CLOSE Button: RANDOM Button REPEAT Button EDIT Button Skip Buttons: / (Search Buttons: / ) for Australia, China, Singapore and General Models Only * :: Provided E-6 * Provided for U.K. and Europe Models Only 2 (Up) Buttons Remote Control Sensor (ECHO Buttons) 1 * A/B/C/D/E Button L M N O P RANDOM Play Indicator Music Calendar Indicator Music Calendar OVER 15 Indicator Disc Indicator Track Number Indicator Time Display Play Indicator: EDIT Indicator Tape Side Indicator (S, F) REPEAT Indicator Program (PROG) Play Indicator For Tape deck Display (See figure 3 on page 7 at the beginning part of this manual.) R S T U V W X Y [ \ ] ^ a b c d e f g h Reverse MODE Selector Button DOLBY NR Button Deck 1 Cassette Compartment Deck 1 EJECT Button Fast Wind Button: Stop Button: DUBBING (NOR/HIGH) Indicator Reverse Mode Indicator Recording (REC) Indicator Tape Number Indicator Play Direction Indicator Dolby ( ) B NR Indicator Tape Number Indicator Tape Counter Play Button: Fast Wind Button: Speakers (Front/Center/Rear) Deck 2 EJECT Button (See figure 4 on page 8 at the beginning part of this manual.) Deck 2 Cassette Compartment i j YST Port Names of control buttons ■ CD player control buttons (See figure 5 on page 9 at the beginning part of this manual.) G H I J K L M Track Number Input Buttons DUBBING (NORMAL/HIGH) Buttons REC/PAUSE Button Speaker Terminals REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER ■ Amplifier/tuner control buttons 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 @ A B C D E F Remote Control Transmitter Window Preset Station Number Buttons A, B, C, D, E Selector Buttons TEST Button TIME Button PROGRAM Button Disc Play MODE Selector Button DISC SKIP Button REPEAT Button Skip Buttons: / (Search Buttons: / ) INPUT Selector Button N O P Q R S USER Button ■ Tape deck control buttons CENTER/REAR/DELAY Selector Button LEVEL Control Buttons SLEEP Button POWER Switch VOLUME – (Down)/+ (Up) Buttons RANDOM Button STOP Button: OPEN/CLOSE Button: PLAY/PAUSE Button: EDIT Button TAPE Button PROGRAM Button T U V W X Y MUSIC Button FLAT Button TUNER Input Selector Button PRESET Number (Down)/ (Up) Buttons E-7 REC/PAUSE Button TAPE 1/2 Button Play Button: Stop Button: Play Button: Fast Wind Buttons: / English NAMES OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER Loading the batteries for the remote control transmitter Proper use of the remote control transmitter (See figure 6 on page 9.) (See figure 7 on page 9.) 1 Remove the battery compartment cover. (Slide the cover in the direction of the arrow.) 2 Aim (within the range of 60° with no obstacles) the remote control transmitter at the remote control sensor and operate as shown. Insert 2 “AA” size batteries (UM/SUM-3, R6, HP-7 or equivalent) into the battery compartment. * Installing the batteries improperly may cause failure. 3 Notes concerning use • Replace the batteries if control distance decreases or operation becomes unstable. • Periodically clean the transmitter window on the remote control transmitter and the sensor on the main unit with a soft cloth. • Exposing the sensor on the main unit to strong light (especially an inverter type of fluorescent lamp etc.) may interfere with operation. In this case, reposition the main unit to avoid direct lighting. • Keep the remote control transmitter away from moisture, excessive heat, shock and vibrations. • The remote control transmitter’s usable range is within 0.2m (8”) and 6m (20’) away from the sensor. Replace the battery compartment cover. Precautions for battery use Insert the batteries according to the direction indicated in the battery compartment. Replace all batteries with new ones at the same time. Remove the batteries if they are weak or if the unit is not in use for long periods. Don’t mix normal batteries with rechargeable batteries. • • • • SETTING UP THE MAIN UNIT Place the main unit as illustrated on the left and allow spaces more than indicated around the main unit and more than 10 cm (3-15/16”) behind the main unit to assure good ventilation. Be sure not to place another unit or any object on top of the main unit to prevent the ventilation holes on the top panel of the main unit from being obstructed. Otherwise, it may cause fire or damage to the main unit. Setup examples Main unit 10 cm 10 cm 1 cm 1 cm Notes • When placing the front speakers apart from the main unit, allow a space of at least 10 cm (3-15/16”) above, behind and on the both sides of the main unit. • If the main unit is put in a rack, the front of it must be fully opened. • Disconnect the AC supply lead from the AC outlet before connecting or disconnecting any component. 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm E-8 This system is designed to provide the best sound-field quality with a 5 speaker configuration: front speakers, rear speakers and a center speaker. You may omit the center speaker, if for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker. (Refer to the “4Speaker Configuration” shown below.) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus the effect sounds. The rear speakers are used for the effect and surround sounds, and the center speaker is for the center sounds (dialog etc.). Speaker configuration (1) Front L Center (1) 5-Speaker Configuration Front R This configuration is the most effective and recommended one. In this configuration, the center speaker is necessary as well as the rear speakers. If the sound field program DOLBY PRO LOGIC or DOLBY 3 STEREO is selected, conversations will be output from the center speaker and the ambience will be excellent. ● Set the center channel mode to the “NORMAL” position. (For details, refer to page 15.) Dialogue Surround sound Rear R Rear L (2) 4-Speaker Configuration (2) Front L The center speaker is not used in this configuration. If the sound field program DOLBY PRO LOGIC is selected, the center sound is output from the left and the right front speakers, although the program DOLBY 3 STEREO is useless in this configuration. However, the sound effect of other programs can be the same as that of the 5speaker configuration. ● Be sure to set the center channel mode to the “PHANTOM” position. (For details, refer to page 15.) Front R Dialogue Surround sound Rear L Note Be sure to use two rear speakers. If you connect one rear speaker only, sound will not be output from the rear speaker. Rear R Speaker placement Front speakers: Rear speakers: Front R Center Servo Active Technology Front L Center speaker: Servo Active Technology TV set Rear Rear R R Rear L Rear L E-9 In normal position. Behind your listening position, facing slightly inward. Nearly six feet (approx. 1.8 m) up from the floor. Precisely between the front speakers. English SETTING UP THE SPEAKERS SETTING UP THE SPEAKERS ■ Mounting the rear speakers 1 Mount the rear speakers on a shelf, rack or on the floor directly, or hang them on the wall. To mount the rear speakers on a wall 1 Attach the provided mounting bracket to the rear of the speaker by using the provided screws. 2 Fasten screws into a firm wall or wall support as shown in the diagram, and hang the holes of the mounting bracket on the protruding screws. * The holes are arranged so that the speakers can be mounted in a side long, upright or upside-down way. * Make sure that the screws are caught by a narrow part of the holes securely. Wall/ wall support 2 Notes Never attach the bracket to the speaker conversely. ● Tapping screw (Available at the hardware store) Good ● No good Speaker cords should be connected to the speaker’s terminals after the bracket has attached to the speaker to prevent the speaker cords pressed between the speaker and the bracket. 40mm To hang in a side long way Hang the speakers so that each of them faces inside as figured left. WARNING: ● Each speaker weighs 0.8 kg (1 lbs. 12 oz.). Do not mount them on thin plywood or soft wall surface material, as the screws may come out of the flimsy surface, causing the speakers to fall down and be damaged, or result in personal injury. ● Do not fasten the speakers to wall with nails, adhesives, or other unsound hardware. Long-term use and vibrations may cause them to fall down. ● To avoid accidents resulting from tripping over loose speaker cables, fix them to the wall. E-10 ■ Mounting the center speaker Place the speaker on top of the TV or on the floor under the TV or inside the TV rack so that it is stabilized. When placing the speaker on top of the TV, to prevent the speaker from falling down, put the provided pads at four points on bottom of the speaker. Notes • Do not place the speaker on top of the TV whose area is smaller than the bottom area of the speaker. If placed, the speaker may drop out causing an injury to you. • Though this speaker is a magnetic shielding type, there may be some influence on a TV picture depending on the type of TV or the placement of the speaker. In such a case, place the speaker apart from the TV so that there is no influence on TV picture. CONNECTIONS Never plug the AC supply lead of this system into the AC outlet until all connections are completed. How to Connect: Connecting speakers Connect the provided speaker cords to the SPEAKERS terminals properly as shown below. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers. Make sure that the polarity of the speaker wires is correct, that is the + and – markings are observed. If these wires are reversed, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. As a sure method, connect the wire with a silver line to the + terminals on both main unit and speaker, and connect the wire with no line to the – terminals on both of them. (See figure 8 on page 1 0.) Connect the provided speakers to the SPEAKERS terminals on the rear of the main unit. Connect the front speakers (NX-GX70) to the FRONT SPEAKERS terminals, the center speaker (NX-C70) to the CENTER SPEAKERS terminals and the rear speakers (NXE70) to the REAR SPEAKERS terminals. Do not connect speakers other than the designated to the respective SPEAKERS terminals. * Use the provided speaker cords for the connections. Normally, use the short cords to connect with the front speakers, and use the long ones to connect with the rear speakers. Caution Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other as this could damage the amplifier and/or speakers. Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) Note on connecting a subwoofer (separate purchase) ➀ Press up the tab. ➁ Insert the bare wire. ➀ You may wish to add a subwoofer to reinforce the bass frequencies. Connect the SUBWOOFER OUT terminal of the main unit to the INPUT terminal of the subwoofer amplifier, and connect the speaker terminals of the subwoofer amplifier to the subwoofer. With some subwoofers, including the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, the amplifier and subwoofer are in the same unit. * The SUBWOOFER OUT terminal is for output to a monaural amplifier driving a subwoofer. Only frequencies below 200 Hz from the front and center channels are output. ➂ ➁ [Remove approx. 5mm (1/4”) insulation from the speaker wires.] ➂ Press down the tab and secure the wire. Note To connect the speaker wires from the center speaker (NX-C70) to the CENTER SPEAKERS terminals on the main unit, make sure to connect the wire with a silver line to the + terminal and the wire with no line to the – terminal. E-11 English SETTING UP THE SPEAKERS CONNECTIONS Antenna connection (1) (1) Supplied FM antenna ANTENNA FM GND Connect the FM antenna wire to the corresponding terminal and direct the FM antenna wire to the direction where the strongest signal can be received. AM 75Ω UNBAL. (2) Supplied AM (MW/LW) loop antenna Connect the AM (MW/LW) loop antenna wires to the corresponding terminals. Position the AM (MW/LW) loop antenna for optimum reception. Place the AM (MW/LW) loop antenna on a shelf etc., or install it on the rack or wall with screws (not supplied). (2) Notes • When static is still heard even after adjusting the position of the AM (MW/LW) loop antenna, try reversing the wire connections (right to left). • Do not place the AM (MW/LW) loop antenna on the unit. It will result in noise generation, since the unit is equipped with digital electronics. Place the AM (MW/LW) loop antenna away from the unit. ANTENNA FM GND (3) External FM antenna AM Use an external FM antenna instead of an indoor FM antenna if you need better reception. Consult your dealer. 75Ω UNBAL. (4) External AM (MW/LW) antenna 15 m (49 feet) (3) Use an external AM (MW/LW) antenna if you need better reception. Consult your dealer. (4) Note When using an external AM (MW/LW) antenna, be sure to keep the wire of the AM (MW/LW) loop antenna connected. 7.5 m (25 feet) Earth rod ANTENNA FM GND AM or 75Ω UNBAL. FREQUENCY STEP switch (General model only) Because the interstation frequency spacing differs in different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch (located at the rear) according to the frequency spacing in your area. Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC supply lead of this unit from the AC outlet. ANTENNA FM GND AM 75Ω UNBAL. SPEAKERS CENTER/REAR CENTER MODE NORMAL PHANTOM REAR R CENTER L REAR E-12 Connecting external components Connecting the AC supply lead (See figure 9 on page 1 1.) (See figure @ on page 1 2.) This system can be connected with external audio and video components. Make connections between this system and other components using RCA pin plug connector cables correctly, that is to say L (left) to L and R (right) to R. Also, refer to the owner’s manual for each component to be connected to this system. • • After completing all connections, plug the AC supply lead into a convenient AC outlet. Unplug the AC supply lead from the AC outlet if the unit is not to be used for a long period of time. REMOVING THE FRONT GRILLES OF FRONT SPEAKERS (See figure A on page 1 2.) The front grille is fastened to the enclosure at four points, and can be removed if desired. To remove the grille, first hold the bottom of the grille and unfasten the lower part of the grille by pulling it gently, and then hold both sides of the grille and slowly pull straight away from the speaker. To reattach, line up the four pegs on the inside surface of the grille with the four corresponding holes on the speaker and push gently. Note When the grille is removed, take care not to touch the speaker units with your hands or to exert excessive force with tools. LISTENING WITH HEADPHONES (See figure B on page 1 2.) • • Be sure that your headphones have a 3.5 mm (1/8”) diameter plug and are between 16 ohms and 50 ohms impedance. Recommended impedance is 32 ohms. When headphones are connected, the speakers are defeated automatically and you can listen to the sound to be output from the front speakers through headphones. Adjust the VOLUME control for desired volume. TURNING THE POWER ON/OFF TO THIS SYSTEM (See figure C on page 1 2.) STANDBY mode While the power is on, pressing the POWER switch (or the POWER switch on the remote control transmitter) switches the system to the STANDBY mode. (In this mode, the display shows only the time.) In this mode, main voltage is still present inside the system. If you want to switch off the system completely, disconnect the AC power plug from the AC outlet. If the AC supply lead is connected to the AC outlet, this system can be turned ON and OFF (STANDBY mode) by pressing the POWER switch on the front panel of the main unit or the POWER switch on the remote control transmitter. Automatic power-off function The power of this system will be automatically turned off if there is no operation on the control parts of this system, no illumination on the graphic equalizer level indicators and no playback of CD or tape for about 30 minutes. * This function is not available unless time setting is made on the built-in clock. E-13 English CONNECTIONS SETTING THE CLOCK (See figure D on page 1 2.) 1 While the power is on, press the DISPLAY button to display the time. If the power is off, you can proceed to the next step. 2 While holding the TIME ADJ button pressed, press the HOUR button and set the hour. * Press the HOUR button once to advance the time by 1 hour. Press and hold to advance continuously. * To reverse the hour, press the button instead of the HOUR button. 3 Europe, U.K., Australia, China and Singapore models use a 24-hour display. U.S.A. and Canada models use a 12-hour display shown by “AM (PM) 12:00”. For General model, either the 24-hour display or the 12-hour display is selected depending on the setting of the FREQUENCY STEP switch on the rear panel, so you cannot select a desired type freely. In the event of a power failure or when the AC supply lead is disconnected. The time display will go out, however, the clock will function for about 5 minutes without power supply. So you do not have to reset the time if the AC power supply is resumed within about 5 minutes. When the AC power supply is resumed after more than 5 minutes pass without power supply, the time display will flash on and off to indicate that the time must be reset. While holding the TIME ADJ button pressed, press the MIN button and set the minute. * Press the MIN button once to advance the time by 1 minute. Press and hold to advance continuously. * The hour setting will not advance even if minute is advanced from “59” to “00”. * To reverse the minute, press the button instead of the MIN button. ADJUSTING BRIGHTNESS OF THE DISPLAY This adjustment can be made even though the power of this unit is off (in the standby mode). If desired, you can adjust brightness of the display. 1 Press and hold the DISPLAY button for more than 2 seconds so that “DIMMER±0” appears on the display. 2 Holding the DISPLAY button pressed, turn the VOLUME control clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease brightness. Control range When the power is on: ±0 to –6 (Preset value: ±0) When the power is off: +3 to –3 (Preset value: ±0) VOLUME CONTROL Front panel operation Rotate the VOLUME control to the “UP” direction to increase the volume, and to the “DOWN” direction to decrease the volume. VOLUME Remote control operation Press the VOLUME + button to increase the volume and the VOLUME – button to decrease the volume. VOLUME DOWN UP * Adjusted volume level is shown by the volume level meter and in figures on the display. VOLUME E-14 This procedure lets you adjust the sound output level balance between the front, center, and rear speakers using the built-in test tone generator. When this adjustment is performed, the sound output level heard at the listening position will be the same from each speaker. This is important for the best performance of the built-in Doiby Pro Logic surround decoder. The adjustment of each speaker output level should be done at your listening position with the remote control transmitter. Otherwise, the result may not be satisfactory. CENTER MODE NORMAL PHANTOM Before operation Set the CENTER MODE switch on the rear panel of the main unit to the position suitable for your speaker system configuration. (Refer to page 9 for details.) NORMAL (For 5 speaker configuration): Select this position when you use the center speaker. ANTENNA FM GND AM 75Ω UNBAL. SPEAKERS CENTER/REAR CENTER MODE NORMAL PHANTOM (For 4 speaker configuration): Select this position when you do not use the center speaker. The center sound will be output from the left and right front speakers. PHANTOM REAR R SUBWOOFER L REAR CENTER VIDEO SIGNAL OUT MONITOR OUT OUT DO NOT CONNECT THIS UNIT TO SPEAKERS OTHER THAN NX-C70 (CENTER) OR NX-E70 (REAR). VCR IN LD/TV OUT R MD/AUX L IN R SINCE THIS UNIT HAS AN ACTIVE SERVO CIRCUIT BUILT–IN. DO NOT CONNECT IT TO SPEAKERS OTHER THAN NX–GX70. L AUDIO SIGNAL FRONT SPEAKERS DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 1 Press the POWER switch to turn the power on. 2 Turn the VOLUME control fully counterclockwise to OPEN/CLOSE 1 PTY SEE K T STAR 2 DISC 3 MO FRE PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC Q PS/P TY/R RAND T/CT REPE AT VOLUME A/B/C/D/E DOWN UP MEMORY TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE 1 2, 5 PRO LOGIC” lights up on the sound field program indicator. NORMAL MODE HIGH DOLBY NR POWER UP INPUT DOWN USER 3 Press the PROGRAM button once or more so that “ OM CD INPUT decrease the volume to minimum. Y LA DISP IT ED DE 3 PROGRAM DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR 4 Press the TEST button. MIN PLAYBACK 1 2 REC/PLAYBACK * “TEST” flashes on and off on the display. 5 Press the VOLUME + (up) button to increase the volume. EJECT EJECT You will hear a test tone (like pink noise) from the left front speaker, then the center speaker, then the right front speaker, and then the rear speakers, for about two seconds each. The display changes as shown below. 1 2 CD 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 6 7 8 0 A B C D E PROG TAPE EDIT +I0 MODE REPEAT REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 CENTER/REAR /DELAY RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER TEST LEVEL PLAY FLAT MUSIC STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY TAPE PROGRAM 3 1 (L and R) USER POWER SLEEP INPUT VOLUME 2 5 9 TIME DISC SKIP 4 5 PRESET 5 * The test tone from the left rear speaker and the right rear speaker will be heard at the same time. CONTINUED E-15 English SPEAKER BALANCE ADJUSTMENT SPEAKER BALANCE ADJUSTMENT 6 Adjust the sound output levels of the center speaker and the rear speakers by using the LEVEL control buttons so that they become almost as same as that of the front speakers. ● When the test tone is output from the center speaker, pressing the LEVEL control buttons change the output level of the center speaker. MUSIC 1 2 CD 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 6 7 8 5 0 A B C D E PROG TAPE EDIT +I0 MODE REPEAT CENTER/REAR /DELAY TEST LEVEL 100 350 1K 3.5K 10K RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER DISC SKIP 7 USER NOR TEST PRESET 9 TIME REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 PROGRAM PRO LOGIC 5 PLAY FLAT MUSIC STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY Adjustable ● TAPE PROGRAM USER POWER SLEEP INPUT When the test tone is output from the rear speakers, pressing the LEVEL control buttons change the output level of the rear speakers. VOLUME 6 MUSIC 100 350 PROGRAM PRO LOGIC USER NOR TEST 1K 3.5K 10K Adjustable * Pressing the + button raises and the – button lowers the level. 7 If the adjustments have finished, press the TEST button to cancel the test tone. * “TEST” disappears from the display. Notes ● Once you have completed these adjustments, you can adjust whole sound level on your audio system by using the VOLUME control (or the VOLUME keys on the remote control transmitter) only. ● In step 6, if the center channel mode is in the “PHANTOM” position, the sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted. This is because in this mode, the center sound is automatically output from the left and right front speakers. E-16 CD playback DISC selector buttons 7 2, 4 DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE 1 SEEK PTY T 2 DISC STAR 3 /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC RAND MO 4 Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to close the disc table. * The total number of tracks and the total playing time of the disc being selected will be displayed for several seconds. * The music calendar will be displayed only for the number of tracks on the disc being selected. * If the compact disc contains more than 15 tracks, the “OVER 15” indicator will light up on the music calendar. AY MEMORY IT VOLUME A/B/C/D/E UP TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE NORMAL MODE HIGH DOLBY NR DUBBING TIMER REC MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR MIN PLAYBACK 1 2 Place discs on the trays, label side up. * Up to three discs can be loaded on the trays. To load the third disc, rotate the disc table by pressing the DISC SKIP button on the remote control transmitter. * 8 cm (3”) discs may be played without an adaptor. AT UP PHONES Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to open the disc table. ED DE DOWN USER PL Press the CD input selector button. INPUT DOWN POWER DIS 1 2 3 REPE OM CD INPUT English COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION REC/PLAYBACK The disc on the tray located on the top of this indicator is now being selected. Music calendar EJECT EJECT 1 POWER M USER TAPE 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 TOTAL TRACK 3 VOLUME Total number of tracks 5 1 2, 4 5 3, 6 1 2 1 2 3 6 7 8 6 7 8 Lights up only when the all disc play mode is selected. 4 4 5 5 PRESET 9 0 A B C D E TIME PROG TAPE EDIT +I0 MODE REPEAT RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER DISC SKIP REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 CENTER/REAR /DELAY TEST LEVEL PLAY FLAT MUSIC STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY 6 If necessary, select another disc by pressing the DISC SKIP button on the remote control transmitter once or more (so that the corresponding disc tray number is located on the top of the disc indicator). 7 Press the play/pause / button to start playback from track 1. * The “ ” indicator will appear and playback will begin. As the playback of each track on the music calendar is finished, that track number will go out. USER INPUT VOLUME 7 TAPE PROGRAM POWER SLEEP If necessary, change the disc play mode by pressing the disc play MODE selector button on the remote control transmitter watching the display. Single disc play mode: Only a designated disc is played back. All disc play mode: All discs on the disc table are played back sequentially. 2 CD 3 Total playing time 1 POWER For easier operation Pressing the DISC selector button (1, 2 or 3) will select the disc directly, and playback will begin from track 1 automatically. E-17 COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION Direct operation To interrupt playback 1 Press the play/pause / button. * The “ ” indicator will flash. 2 Press the play/pause from the same point. / When the power is off (in the standby mode), pressing the CD input selector button or the DISC selector (1, 2 or 3) button will turn the power on and start CD playback automatically. When the power is on, even if an input source other than CD player is selected, pressing a DISC selector button or closing the disc table by pushing the front edge of the disc table gently will start playback directly. In this case, if the tape deck is playing back a tape, it will be stopped automatically. * These ways of playback can also be used to close the disc table. If the table is closed in these ways, playback will begin automatically, however, the display will not show the total number of tracks and the total playing time of the disc to be played back. button to resume playback To stop playback Press the stop button. To switch the unit off after use Turn the unit off by pressing the POWER switch. (The indicators will go off except for the current time display.) PLAYXCHANGE During playback, you can open the disc table by pressing the DISC CHANGE button without interrupting playback. However, in this case, pressing the DISC SKIP button or a DISC selector button has no effect. Precautions • If TV or radio interference occurs during CD player operation, move the unit away from the TV or radio. • Subjecting the unit to shock or vibration can cause mistracking. • Playing back some compact discs at high volume can cause mistracking. In this case, listen at lower volume. • Do not pull open the disc table forcibly with your hands. • Do not push the disc table while it is moving. • If the power fails while the table is open, wait until the power supply returns or gently push the table manually to close it. • The temperature range for playing back compact discs is recommended to be 5°C (41°F) – 35°C (95°F). Direct-selection playback 1 2 CD 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 6 7 8 5 By using the track number input buttons on the remote control transmitter, any track you wish to listen to can be played back directly. 1 2 CD 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 6 7 8 5 5 PRESET 9 0 A B C D E TIME PROG TAPE EDIT +I0 MODE REPEAT 5 Use the track number input buttons to select the desired track number. Playback will begin automatically. PRESET 9 0 RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER E DISC SKIP REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 CENTER/REAR /DELAY TEST LEVEL PLAY FLAT MUSIC STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY +I0 A. For example, to choose selection 5 Press the “5” button. TAPE PROGRAM USER B. For example, to choose selection 12 (1) Press the “+10” button. (2) Within 3 seconds, press “2” button. POWER SLEEP INPUT VOLUME C. For example, to choose selection 20 (1) Press the “+10” button. (2) Within 3 seconds, press the “+10” button again. (3) Within 3 seconds, press the “0” button. Note If you select a track number higher than the number of tracks on the disc, playback will begin from the last track on the disc. E-18 “Skip search” and “Manual search” are performed using the same buttons. 2 Skip search The beginning of any track can be found automatically. DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE 1 2 1 SEEK PTY T 2 DISC STAR 3 /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC RAND MO PL DIS IT ED DE AT REPE OM VOLUME A/B/C/D/E CD DOWN INPUT UP MEMORY TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE NORMAL MODE HIGH DOLBY NR POWER UP INPUT DOWN USER AY DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR PLAYBACK MIN 1 2 Notes • This function can also be performed while the unit is stopped. Press the play/pause / button when your desired track number appears on the track number display. Playback will begin from the beginning of the track. • This function will be performed forward or backward from any point on the disc. However, it will not move forward during playback of the final track. EJECT 1 1 2 CD 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 6 7 8 A 2 B TIME PROG REPEAT REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 TEST LEVEL Manual search 5 5 PRESET 9 0 C D E TAPE EDIT +I0 1 2 RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER DISC SKIP CENTER/REAR /DELAY Press the button to advance or button to reverse through the disc. Press once for each track to be advanced or reversed. once to advance to the track following the • Press one now playing back. once to return to the start of the track now • Press playing back. twice to return to the track before the track • Press now playing back. REC/PLAYBACK EJECT MODE Select a disc and begin playback. PLAY FLAT MUSIC STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY 1 TAPE PROGRAM USER Begin playback. Press and hold the button to advance playback rapidly, and the button to reverse playback rapidly. * The sound can be heard (although slightly garbled) during manual search in either direction. This is convenient for reviewing the contents quickly. POWER SLEEP INPUT Note Manual search can also be performed while playback is paused, though no sound will be heard. VOLUME E-19 English COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION Program play 6 1 You can program up to 20 tracks in any desired order. DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE 1 SEEK PTY T 2 STAR 3 DISC /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC MO DE DIS If necessary, select a desired disc by pressing the DISC SKIP button. 4 Use the track number input buttons to select the desired track number. * The selected track number and the total play time of the programmed tracks will light up on the display, and soon it is replaced by the display of the next playback order. Programmed track numbers on the selected disc will stop flashing and light up on the music calendar. * Pressing the TIME button displays the total play time of the programmed tracks for about 1 second, and then it is replaced by the display of the next playback order. IT VOLUME A/B/C/D/E CD INPUT UP INPUT DOWN UP MEMORY TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE NORMAL MODE HIGH DOLBY NR POWER 3 AY DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR MIN PLAYBACK TIME 1 2 REC/PLAYBACK 1 2 CD 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 6 7 8 9 0 A B C D E TAPE EDIT +I0 TIME PROG MODE REPEAT 2 DISC SKIP 3 CENTER/REAR /DELAY When in the stop mode, press the PROG button to prepare for programming. * “PROG” and “P-01” will light up on the display, and all track numbers on the selected disc begin flashing. ED DOWN USER PL Load discs and close the disc table. AT REPE OM RAND 1 2 5 5 PRESET RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER PLAY REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 TEST FLAT LEVEL MUSIC STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY 4 * For example, to choose selection 12 (1) Press the “+10” button. (2) Within 3 seconds, press the “2” button. 1 6 TAPE PROGRAM 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for any other track. Up to 20 tracks can be programmed. 6 Press the play/pause programmed tracks. USER POWER SLEEP INPUT VOLUME Display information during programming USER TAPE 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 OVER 15 TRACK PROG VOLUME Playback order Music calendar PROGRAM OGIC HALL USER TAPE 1 Selected disc 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 TOTAL 13 14 15 OVER 15 TRACK PROG VOLUME Selected track number button to start playback of Notes It is also possible to program a sequence of tracks while looking at the list of tracks on the surface of the disc before closing the disc table. • During playback or pause, programming is not possible. • If the total time of the programmed tracks becomes 100 minutes or more, the highest position of a figure will not be displayed. • The total time of the programmed tracks will not be displayed, if track number 16 or higher is programmed. • Skip search can be performed during playback, but only within the range of the programmed tracks. • Manual search can be performed during playback to search all tracks, including unprogrammed tracks. • If programs are made selecting tracks from more than one disc, pressing the DISC CHANGE button is useless during program play. • PROGRAM OGIC HALL / Total playing time E-20 To stop program play / • • DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE Press the stop button. The first programmed track number will be displayed. To resume playback, press the play/pause / button. Playback will begin from the beginning of the program. To cancel a programmed sequence 1 SEEK PTY T 2 DISC STAR 3 /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC RAND MO There are several methods as described below. • Press the stop button while the unit is stopped. • Open the disc table • Switch off the power. AY VOLUME A/B/C/D/E CD INPUT UP INPUT DOWN UP MEMORY TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE NORMAL MODE HIGH DOLBY NR POWER PL AT DOWN USER DIS IT ED DE REPE OM DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR PLAYBACK MIN 1 2 To check program data REC/PLAYBACK EJECT 1. If during playing back, press the stop button. 2. Press the PROG button. 3. Each time the button is pressed, the track numbers and sequential order of the programmed tracks can be checked one after another. The display of the track number can be returned (sequentially in reverse order) by pressing the button. EJECT To correct program data PROG 1 2 CD 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 6 7 8 5 5 PRESET 9 0 A B C D E TIME PROG TAPE EDIT +I0 MODE REPEAT RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER DISC SKIP REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 CENTER/REAR /DELAY TEST LEVEL 1. Follow the procedure described in “To check program data”. 2. Display the track number to be corrected by pressing the or button. 3. Press a track number input button to select a track to replace the one displayed. The previously programmed track will be cleared from the memory and the new one will be programmed. 4. When the correction has finished, press the PROG button or play/pause / button once again. PLAY FLAT MUSIC STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY / TAPE PROGRAM USER POWER SLEEP INPUT VOLUME E-21 English COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION 2 Repeat play 1 All discs, an entire disc, a single track or a programmed sequence can be continuously repeated. DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE 1 SEEK PTY T 2 DISC STAR 3 /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC RAND MO / button. IT ED DE AT REPE VOLUME Repeat play modes UP UP TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE SINGLE REPEAT (S REP) A single track is played back repeatedly. * This is also available in the program play mode and the random play mode. (If the repeat play mode is switched off, the program play mode or the random play mode will be resumed.) NORMAL MODE HIGH DUBBING TIMER REC MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR PLAYBACK Press the play/pause INPUT DOLBY NR PHONES 2 OM DOWN MEMORY While watching the display, press the REPEAT button once or more to select a desired repeat play mode (S REP or F REP). AY A/B/C/D/E INPUT POWER PL CD DOWN USER DIS 1 MIN 2 1 REC/PLAYBACK FULL REPEAT (F REP) EJECT EJECT When the unit is in the single disc play mode: A designated disc is played back repeatedly. * In the random play mode, the selected disc is repeatedly played back, but the order of tracks is different every time. When the unit is in the all disc play mode: All discs on the disc table are played back repeatedly. * In the random play mode, the random play is performed among all discs and repeated with a different order of tracks every time. 1 1 2 CD 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 6 7 8 9 0 A B C D E TAPE EDIT +I0 TIME PROG MODE REPEAT CENTER/REAR /DELAY TEST LEVEL Note In the program play mode, a sequence of programmed tracks is played back repeatedly. 5 RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER DISC SKIP REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 5 PRESET PLAY FLAT MUSIC STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY 2 To cancel the repeat play TAPE PROGRAM Press the REPEAT button once or more so that the (S, F) REP indicator goes out. USER POWER SLEEP INPUT VOLUME (off) S REP F REP E-22 Random play 3 1 Tracks on a selected disc or all discs on the disc table can be played back in a random order. DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE 1 SEEK PTY T 2 STAR 3 DISC /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC MO DE Press the RANDOM button to begin random play. * The “RANDOM” indicator will light up. IT ED VOLUME A/B/C/D/E INPUT 3 AY If necessary, switch the disc play mode by pressing the disc play MODE selector button. * If the single disc play mode is selected, select a desired disc by pressing the DISC SKIP button. AT CD UP INPUT DOWN USER PL Load discs and close the disc table. REPE OM RAND DOWN UP MEMORY TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE MODE NORMAL To cancel the random play HIGH DOLBY NR POWER DIS 1 2 DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L Active Servo Press the stop button, or press the RANDOM button again. The “RANDOM” indicator will go out. Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR 1 2 CD 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 6 2 MIN 7 8 5 5 PRESET 9 0 A B C D E TIME PROG TAPE EDIT +I0 MODE REPEAT RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER DISC SKIP REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 CENTER/REAR /DELAY TEST LEVEL PLAY FLAT MUSIC Note This feature will not function during programming, or during program play. 3 STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY 1 TAPE PROGRAM USER POWER SLEEP INPUT VOLUME Switching the time display TIME Each time the TIME button is pressed, the display will change as described below. 1 2 CD 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 6 7 A B TIME PROG MODE REPEAT 8 5 9 0 C D E TAPE EDIT +I0 RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER DISC SKIP [Example] When the second track is being played back (Refer to the illustration on the left.) 5 PRESET STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY ➀ ➀ The elapsed play time for the track now playing back will TRACK REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 CENTER/REAR /DELAY TEST LEVEL PLAY FLAT MUSIC TAPE PROGRAM USER POWER SLEEP INPUT VOLUME ➁ ➁ REM TRACK ➂ ➂ TOTAL TRACK ➃ ➃ be displayed. * 8 seconds have passed since the beginning of the second track. The remaining play time for the current track will be displayed. * 2 minutes and 58 seconds remain till the end of the second track. The total play time of the disc will be displayed. (If the unit is in the program play mode, the total play time of the programmed tracks will be displayed.) The total remaining play time from the point being played at that time will be displayed. * 41 minutes remain till the end of the disc. TOTAL REM TRACK Notes ● During random play, the total remaining play time on the disc will not be displayed. ● The remaining play time will not be displayed for track number 16 or higher. ● If track number 16 or higher is programmed, during the program play, the total play time and the total remaining play time will not be displayed. E-23 English COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION TUNING OPERATION Normally, if station signals are strong and there is no interference, quick automatic-search tuning (Automatic tuning) is possible. However, if signals of the station you want to select are weak, you must tune to it manually (Manual tuning). 4, 3 DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE Automatic tuning 1 SEEK PTY T 2 DISC STAR 3 /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC MO AY INPUT MEMORY 1 Press the INPUT selector or button once or more so that “TUNER” appears on the display. 2 Select the reception band [FM or AM (MW or LW)] by pressing the PRESET/TUNING/BAND button confirming it on the display. * Do not select a preset tuning mode (in which “PRESET” lights up on the display.) 3 Press the AUTO/MAN’L button so that “AUTO” appears on the display. (In this mode, stations are received in stereo or monaural automatically.) 4 Press the button to tune to a higher frequency, or press the button to tune to a lower frequency. (When tuned in to a station, “TUNED” will light up on the display.) 5 If the station where tuning search stopped is not the desired one, follow step 4 again. * If the tuning search does not stop at the desired station, change to the Manual tuning method as described below. STEREO indicator will light up when an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength is received. VOLUME A/B/C/D/E CD UP INPUT DOWN UP TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE NORMAL MODE HIGH DOLBY NR POWER PL AT DOWN USER DIS IT ED DE REPE OM RAND DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR PLAYBACK MIN 2 1 REC/PLAYBACK EJECT 3, 2 EJECT 2 1 1 2 CD 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 8 9 0 B C D E TAPE EDIT +I0 TIME PROG MODE REPEAT RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER DISC SKIP REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 CENTER/REAR /DELAY TEST LEVEL PLAY FLAT MUSIC * PRESET 8 6 A STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY 1 Manual tuning TAPE PROGRAM USER POWER SLEEP INPUT 1 2 Follow steps 1 and 2 of the Automatic tuning method. 3 Press and hold the button to tune to a higher frequency, or press and hold the button to tune to a lower frequency. Release it just before reaching the desired frequency, and then press it repeatedly until the desired frequency appears. (When tuned in to a station, “TUNED” will light up on the display.) VOLUME Press the AUTO/MAN’L button so that “AUTO” disappears from the display. (In this mode, stations are received in monaural.) Note If you tune in to an FM station manually, it is received in monaural automatically to increase the signal quality. Note Pressing the TUNER input selector button on the remote control transmitter switches the tuner from a normal tuning mode to a preset tuning mode and vice versa. “AM” is for U.S.A., Canada, Australia, China, Singapore and General models. “MW/LW” is for U.K. and Europe models. E-24 English TUNING OPERATION Preset tuning This unit can store station frequencies selected by tuning operation. With this function, you can select any desired station by only calling the corresponding preset station number. Up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups) can be stored. 4, 2 DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE To store stations 1 SEEK PTY T 2 DISC STAR 3 /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC RAND MO DIS VOLUME A/B/C/D/E DOWN 1 Tune in to a desired station. (Refer to the previous page for tuning procedure.) MEMORY 2 Press the tuner MEMORY button. * “MEMORY” and “PRESET” will flash on the display for about 5 seconds. 3 Select a desired group (A – E) of preset stations by pressing the A/B/C/D/E button confirming it on the display, before “MEMORY” goes out. (In this case, select group A.) 4 Select a preset station number by pressing the button repeatedly before “MEMORY” goes out. (In this case, select “1”.) 5 Within about 5 seconds, press the tuner MEMORY button again. UP INPUT DOWN USER (Example: To store a station to A1) AY AT CD INPUT UP TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE NORMAL MODE HIGH DOLBY NR POWER PL IT ED DE REPE OM DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR PLAYBACK MIN 2 1 REC/PLAYBACK EJECT EJECT 3, 1 2, 5 or TAPE 1 AUTO PRESET 4, 2 MHz 1 2 CD 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 PRESET 8 6 7 8 9 A B C D E TIME PROG TAPE EDIT +I0 MODE REPEAT REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 CENTER/REAR /DELAY TEST LEVEL 0 RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER DISC SKIP PLAY FLAT MUSIC The currently displayed station has been programmed to A1. STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY 3, 1 * In the same way, program other stations to A2, A3 ... A8. * You can program more stations to the preset station numbers of other groups in the same way by selecting other groups in step 3. TAPE PROGRAM USER POWER SLEEP INPUT To recall a preset station VOLUME 1 Select a group of preset stations by pressing the A/B/C/D/E button. 2 Select the desired preset station number by pressing the or button repeatedly. Notes A new setting can be programmed in place of the former one. For presets the setting of the AUTO/MAN’L button is stored along with the station frequency. • • For easier operation By using the preset station number buttons and the A,B,C,D,E selector buttons on the remote control transmitter, a preset station number and a group can be selected directly. E-25 TUNING OPERATION 1 Automatic preset tuning 2 You can also make use of an automatic preset tuning function. By this function, this unit performs automatic tuning and stores stations with strong signals sequentially. Up to 40 stations are stored automatically in the same way as in the manual preset tuning method on the previous page. DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE 1 SEEK PTY T 2 DISC STAR 3 /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PROGRAM RA PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC MO AY VOLUME CD DOWN INPUT UP Press the INPUT selector or button once or more so that “TUNER” appears on the display. 2 Press and hold the tuner MEMORY button for about 2 seconds. * The MEMORY and AUTO indicators will flash. INPUT UP MEMORY TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE This unit performs automatic tuning and searches FM and AM (MW and LW for U.K. and Europe models only) stations in that order. Received stations are programmed to A1, A2 ... A8 sequentially. NORMAL MODE HIGH DOLBY NR POWER PL AT A/B/C/D/E DOWN USER DIS IT ED DE REPE NDOM 1 DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR PLAYBACK MIN 2 1 REC/PLAYBACK When the automatic preset tuning is completed EJECT The display shows the frequencies of the first preset station (stored to A1). Check the contents and the number of preset stations by following the procedure of the section “To recall a preset station” on the previous page. EJECT To recall a preset station 1 2 CD 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 6 7 8 A B TIME PROG MODE REPEAT REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 CENTER/REAR /DELAY TEST LEVEL 0 C D E TAPE EDIT +I0 RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER DISC SKIP PLAY FLAT MUSIC Simply follow the procedure of the section “To recall a preset station” on the previous page. PRESET 9 STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY 1 Notes • The automatic preset tuning search will be performed through all frequencies until 40 stations are stored. If the number of received stations is less than 40, the search will stop after searching all frequencies. * Since FM stations are searched for first, there may be a case that 40 preset stations are occupied by FM stations only. • <U.K. and Europe models only> The unit is originally set so that only RDS stations are searched instead of all FM stations by this operation. (FM stations that employ no RDS network service cannot be programmed.) However, you can change the setting so that the unit can program not only RDS stations but also other FM stations. (Refer to page 30 for details.) • With this function, only stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically. If the station you want to program is weak in signal strength, tune to it in monaural manually and program it by following the procedure of the section “To store stations” on the previous page. • You can replace a preset station by another FM or AM (MW or LW) station manually by simply following the procedure of the section “To store stations” on the previous page. TAPE PROGRAM USER POWER SLEEP INPUT VOLUME Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the programmed data from being lost even if the AC supply lead is disconnected from the AC outlet or the power is cut due to temporary power failure. If, however, the power is cut for more than one week, the memory may be erased. If so, it can be re-programmed by simply following the Preset tuning steps. E-26 <U.K. and Europe models only> RDS (Radio Data System) is a data transmission system gradually being introduced by FM stations in many countries. Stations using this system transmit an inaudible stream of data in addition to the normal radio signal. RDS data contains various information, such as PI (Program Identification), PS (Program Service name), PTY (Program Type), RT (Radio Text), CT (Clock Time), etc. RDS function is carried out among the network stations. * This unit utilizes PS, PTY, RT and CT to receive RDS broadcast stations. Displaying RDS data This unit can be turned into the following four modes to display RDS data. PS (Program Service name) mode: Displays the name of the RDS station now being received instead of the frequency. BBC R3 PTY (Program Type) mode: RT (Radio Text) mode: Displays information about the program (such as title of the song, name of the singer, etc.) on the RDS station now being received. CT (Clock Time) mode: Displays current time. This signal comes from the RDS station now being received. Time of the built-in clock can be automatically corrected on the basis of this signal. Displays the type of the program on the RDS station now being received. There are 15 program types to classify RDS stations as follows. NEWS News: Short accounts of facts, events and publicly expressed views, reportage and actuality. AFFAIRS Current affairs: Topical program expanding or enlarging upon the news, generally in different presentation style or concept, including documentary debate, or analysis INFO Information: Program whose purpose is to impart advice in the widest sense, including meteorological reports and forecasts, consumer affairs, medical help, etc. VARIED Varied: Used for mainly speech-based programs usually of light-entertainment nature, not covered by above categories. Examples are: quizzes, panel games, personality interviews, comedy and satire. POP M Pop: Commercial music, which would generally be considered to be of current popular appeal, often featuring in current or recent record sales charts. ROCK M Rock: Contemporary modern music, usually written and performed by young musicians. M.O.R. M M.O.R.: (Middle of the Road Music). Common term to describe music considered to be “easylistening”, as opposed to Pop, Rock or Classical. Music in this category is often but not always, vocal, and usually of short duration (<5 min.) SPORT Sport: Program concerned with any aspect of sport. EDUCATE Education: Program intended primarily to educate, of which the formal element is fundamental. DRAMA Drama: All radio plays and serials. LIGHT M CULTURE Culture: Programs concerned with any aspect of national or regional culture, including religious affairs, philosophy, social science, language, theatre, etc. Light classics: Classical Musical for general, rather than specialist appreciation. Examples of music in this category are instrumental music, and vocal or choral works. CLASSICS Serious classics: Performances of major orchestral works, symphonies, chamber music etc., and including Grand Opera. OTHER M Other music: Musical styles not fitting into any of the above categories. Particularly used for specialist music, of which Jazz, Rhythm & Blues, Folk, Country, and Reggae are examples. SCIENCE Science: Programs about the natural sciences and technology. E-27 English RECEIVING RDS STATIONS <U.K. and Europe models only> RECEIVING RDS STATIONS ➀ Changing the RDS modes When an RDS station is received, by pressing the FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT selector button once or more, you can change the display mode among the RDS modes employed by the received station in the order shown below. (The RDS mode not employed by the station cannot be selected.) * If the station is not an RDS station, pressing the FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT selector button displays “NO RDS” on the display, and then it returns to the frequency display mode. * When an RDS station is received, the display is automatically turned into the PS mode. Do not press the FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT selector button until the display is turned into the PS mode. If the button is pressed before the display mode is changed, it may occur that “NO PS” appears on the display. This is because the unit has not received all of the RDS data on the station yet. ➁ ➂ FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE ➃ 1 SEEK PTY T 2 DISC STAR 3 /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC RAND MO DIS PL AY IT ED DE AT REPE OM VOLUME A/B/C/D/E CD DOWN INPUT UP INPUT 1 Frequency display mode ➄ Frequency display mode The frequency of the station being received is displayed. PS (Program Service name) mode The name of the station being received is displayed using characters selected from among 64 Roman Alphabets including umlaut sign. If other characters are used on the PS data, they are displayed with underbars. “PS WAIT” may flash while the unit is receiving the data. If the station does not employ the PS data service, “NO PS” lights up on the display for about 2 seconds and then returns to frequency display mode. PTY (Program Type) mode The type of the program on the station being received is displayed. If the RDS station does not employ the PTY data service, “NO PTY” lights up on the display for about 2 seconds and then returns to frequency display mode. If the station has PS data, after that, it turns into the PS mode. In this mode, you can make this unit search for a station which is broadcasting a program of your desired program type. For details, refer to the next page. RT (Radio Text) mode Information about the program on the station being received is displayed. Information is displayed by a maximum of 64 Roman Alphabets including umlaut sign. If other characters are used on the RT data, they are displayed with underbars. “RT WAIT” may flash while the unit is receiving the data. If the RDS station does not employ the RT data service, “NO RT” lights up on the display for about 2 seconds and then returns to frequency display mode. If the station has PS data, after that, it turns into the PS mode. CT (Clock Time) mode Current time is displayed in the following form. The CT data from the station being received changes every minute. 2 PS mode T/CT TY/R S/P EQ P 3 PTY mode FR Hour Minute DOM RAN This unit corrects time of the built-in clock by synchronizing it with the CT data. (This function can also be canceled, if so desired. Refer to page 30 for details.) “CT WAIT” may flash while the unit is receiving the data. If the data is accidentally cut off, “CT WAIT” may flash and then turn into “NO CT”. If the RDS station does not employ the CT data service, “NO CT” lights up on the display for about 2 seconds and then returns to frequency display mode. If the station has PS data, after that, it turns into the PS mode. 4 RT mode 5 CT mode E-28 ● There may be a case that RDS data reception is not possible due to poor reception conditions. If so, press the AUTO/MAN’L button so that “AUTO” goes off from the display. Though the reception mode is changed to monaural by this operation, when you change the display to an RDS mode, RDS data may be displayed. ● If the signal strength gets weakened by external interference during receiving an RDS station, the RDS data service may be cut off suddenly and turn into the frequency display mode. Notes ● RDS data service cannot be utilized by this unit if the received signal is not strong enough. Especially, the RT (Radio Text mode) needs much data to be received, so it may occur that RT mode cannot be displayed even if other RDS modes (PS, PTY, etc.) are displayed. 2 1 Calling a program of your desired program type from among preset RDS stations (PTY SEEK) 3 DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 By designating a program type, the unit automatically searches all preset FM stations for an RDS station which broadcasts a program of that program type. * There are 15 program types to classify RDS stations. For details, refer to page 27. OPEN/CLOSE 1 SEEK PTY T 2 DISC STAR 3 /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PROGRAM RA PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC MO AY VOLUME A/B/C/D/E 1 Turn the unit into the PTY SEEK mode by pressing the PTY SEEK MODE button. * The name of the program type of the station now being received or “NEWS” flashes on the display. 2 Select the desired program type with the or button. * If there is no operation for about 20 seconds, this mode is canceled and turns into the frequency display. If the station has PS data, after that, it turns into the PS mode. 3 Press the PTY SEEK START button. The unit begins searching all preset FM stations. * “PTY HOLD” lights up on the display. * The preset number indicator, the name of the program type and “AUTO” flash. The preset number changes rapidly in sequence. CD INPUT UP INPUT DOWN MEMORY UP TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE MODE NORMAL HIGH DOLBY NR POWER PL AT DOWN USER DIS IT ED DE REPE NDOM DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR PLAYBACK EJECT MIN 1 2 REC/PLAYBACK EJECT ● If a station which broadcasts a program of the program type is found, the unit stops at the station and turns into the frequency display. If the station has PS data, after that, it turns into the PS mode. ● If the called station is not the desired one, press the PTY SEEK START button once more before “PTY HOLD” goes out from the display. The unit begins searching for another station which broadcasts a program of the same program type. ● If no station is found, “NO PTY” appears and then returns to frequency display. If the station has PS data, after that, it turns into the PS mode. * If the PTY SEEK START button is pressed once more during searching, this mode is canceled and turns into the frequency display. If the station has PS data, after that, it turns into the PS mode. To cancel this function If the PTY SEEK MODE button is pressed once more, the PTY SEEK mode is canceled and turns into the frequency display. If the station has PS data, after that, it turns into the PS mode. E-29 English <U.K. and Europe models only> RECEIVING RDS STATIONS <U.K. and Europe models only> RECEIVING RDS STATIONS Other functions which make use of RDS data service ➀ ON (OFF) CT > CLOCK This unit corrects the time of the built-in clock automatically by synchronizing it with the CT data on the RDS station being received. * If you receive an RDS station of some other country, the built-in clock is synchronized with the time setting of the country. * If the built-in clock is not yet set for current time or reset due to a power failure etc., it will be set for the time of the CT data automatically, whether this setting is ON or OFF. ➁ ON (OFF) LOCAL > CT If the RDS station being received employs the local time (summer time etc.) data service, its time is displayed in the CT mode. * If the setting of function ➀ is “ON”, the built-in clock is synchronized with the local time data. ➂ ON (OFF) A. M. > RDS Only RDS stations are searched instead of all FM stations by the automatic preset tuning operation when the setting is ON. (See page 26 for the operating procedure.) If you switch this function OFF, not only RDS stations but also other FM stations are programmed along with MW and LW stations by the automatic preset tuning operation. This unit has the following functions which make use of RDS data service. These are originally in operation [ON]. However, you can cancel these functions [OFF], if so desired. 1 K PTY 2 SEE DE MO EAT REP 3 To switch these functions on and off 1 3, 6 4 5 2 1 Select the FM band by pressing the PRESET/TUNING/BAND button, confirming it on the display. 2 3 Press the DISPLAY button to display the current time. 4 Select the title of function whose setting you want to switch by pressing the PTY SEEK MODE button once or more. 5 Switch the function ON or OFF by pressing the PTY SEEK START button, confirming it on the display. 6 Press the FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT selector button again to restore the frequency display mode. * If the station has PS data, after that, it turns into the PS mode. DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE 1 SEEK PTY T 2 DISC STAR 3 /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC MO AY VOLUME CD DOWN INPUT MEMORY UP INPUT UP TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE MODE NORMAL HIGH DOLBY NR POWER PL AT A/B/C/D/E DOWN USER DIS IT ED DE REPE OM RAND DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC Notes ● Once the setting is changed, it will be stored until it is changed again by the above operation. ● During the operation, if there is no operation for about 20 seconds, this mode is canceled and turns into the frequency display. If the station has PS data, after that, it turns into the PS mode. MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR PLAYBACK EJECT Press the FREQ PS/PTY/RT/CT selector button. The title of function ➀ “ON CT > CLOCK ” is displayed. MIN 1 2 REC/PLAYBACK EJECT E-30 English TAPE DECK OPERATION General information • • • • • • • Detection hole • Tab Do not use C-120 tapes or poor-quality tapes, since they can cause malfunctions. Before loading a tape into the cassette compartment, tighten the tape slack with a pen or pencil. Tapes have removable tabs which prevent accidental recording or erasing from taking place. Removing the tab on the top left protects the side facing you from erasure. Cover the tab holes with adhesive tape to erase or record again. This deck is a Double Cassette Deck with Automatic Reverse Function. Deck 1: Playback only. Deck 2: Playback or recording. This deck features an auto tape selector. Just load the tape, and the tape formula being used will be sensed automatically. This unit can play back metal tapes as well as normal or chrome tapes, however recording cannot be done on metal tapes with good sound quality. When covering erasure prevention tab holes, do not cover the chrome and metal detection holes. Otherwise, the deck will treat tape as normal tape. Do not press the EJECT button during playback or recording. Automatic deck selecting function If you load only one tape into the deck 1 or deck 2 cassette compartment, it is automatically selected and set ready for a playback. Dolby B Type Noise Reduction Dolby noise reduction is an extremely effective method of reducing undesirable background hiss on tapes. This unit incorporates Dolby B type noise reduction system that is the most popular one and almost of commercially available music tapes are recorded with the Dolby B NR. Dolby B NR has a noise reduction effect of about 10 dB in the high frequency range. Dolby noise reduction is a 2 part process that acts both on recording and playback; be sure that the same noise reduction is used on recording and playback. Notes ● Tapes encoded with Dolby NR system should be decoded with the same Dolby NR system. Nevertheless, a Dolby encoded tape can be played back without decoding (and vice versa) with no harm to the recorded sound. ● Noise in the source material cannot be reduced with the Dolby NR system. About the tape counter This unit is equipped with a tape counter that is useful for searching for and locating a desired point on tape. The tape counter for the tape 1 (or 2) currently selected is shown on the display. Pressing the stop button when the unit is stopped will reset the tape counter to “0000”. PROGRAM HALL TAPE 1 USER B VOLUME Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. E-31 TAPE DECK OPERATION Tape 1 or tape 2 playback 4 5 1, 3 DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE 1 SEEK PTY T 2 DISC STAR 3 /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC RAND MO DIS 3 Load a tape into the deck 1 or deck 2 cassette compartment, and close the lid panel completely by pressing the panel until it clicks. * If you have loaded two tapes into both the cassette compartments, select either the tape 1 or tape 2 which you want to play back by pressing the TAPE 1/2 input selector button on the front panel or the TAPE 1/2 button on the remote control transmitter confirming it on the display. 4 Use the Dolby NR system by pressing the DOLBY NR button so that “ B” lights up on the display, if the tape has been recorded with Dolby noise reduction. If not so, set the DOLBY NR button so that “ B” does not light up. * For details, refer to the “Dolby B Type Noise Reduction” on page 31. 5 If necessary, switch the reverse mode to the desired one by pressing the reverse MODE selector button so that the corresponding indicator lights up. AY IT ED DE AT REPE VOLUME A/B/C/D/E CD INPUT UP INPUT DOWN Open the deck 1 or deck 2 cassette compartment by pressing the EJECT button. UP MEMORY TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE NORMAL MODE HIGH DOLBY NR POWER Press the TAPE 1/2 input selector button. OM DOWN USER PL 1 2 DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC AUTO/MAN’L MEMORY Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR PLAYBACK MIN 1 2 REC/PLAYBACK EJECT EJECT 2 6 The reverse MODE selector button can be operated before or during playback, and changes tape playback as follows: 2 3 Side A only Side B only 2 1 3 2 CD 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 6 7 8 5 5 9 0 A B C D E PROG TAPE EDIT +I0 MODE REPEAT REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 CENTER/REAR /DELAY TEST LEVEL Press the play button on the remote control transmitter to listen to side A, or the play button for side B. * When using the play button on the front panel: Pressing the button once begins playback in the direction currently selected. Pressing the play button once more changes the tape running direction and begins playback. * The play direction indicator on the display shows the currently selected tape direction. PRESET TIME 6 RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER DISC SKIP PLAY FLAT MUSIC STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY PROGRAM Moves slowly in the current tape running direction during playback. USER INPUT VOLUME Play direction indicator TAPE POWER SLEEP (Repeats 8 times) Starts from side A. Side A → Side B (Repeats 8 times) Starts from side B. (Side A is not played at the first time.) 6 1 Side A → Side B 1 To stop playback Press the stop E-32 button. Notes • When removing the tape, press the stop button, and then open the cassette compartment. • Even if you press the TAPE 1/2 input selector button on the front panel or the TAPE 1/2 button on the remote control transmitter during playback, the playback of currently selected tape cannot be changed to the other one though the tape number indicator on the display changes. Direct operation When the power is off (in the standby mode), pressing the TAPE 1/2 input selector button or the play button will turn the power on and start playback of the selected tape automatically. When the power is on, even if an input source other than tape deck is selected, pressing the play button (or the fast wind button) will start playback (or fast winding) directly. Winding the tape 1 2 DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE 1 SEEK PTY T 2 DISC STAR 3 /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC RAND MO INPUT MEMORY button to Moves rapidly in the direction of the current playback while searching. IT ED DE AT REPE OM VOLUME 3 Press the stop button to stop. UP UP TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE Note When the tape is wound to the end, this unit will then function as described below, according to the setting of the reverse MODE selector button. : The tape stops at the end. : When the tape reaches the end, playback automatically starts from the reverse side. NORMAL MODE HIGH DUBBING TIMER REC MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR PLAYBACK or fast wind button. INPUT DOLBY NR PHONES Next press the fast wind wind the tape. AY CD DOWN USER PL A/B/C/D/E DOWN POWER DIS If during playback, first press the stop MIN 2 1 REC/PLAYBACK EJECT EJECT Searching for the beginning of a desired selection Carry out the following operation during playback to find the beginning of a desired selection on the tape. 1 2 CD 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 6 7 8 5 5 PRESET 9 0 A B C D E TIME PROG TAPE EDIT +I0 MODE REPEAT RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER DISC SKIP REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 CENTER/REAR /DELAY TEST LEVEL To listen to the same selection Press the button if the direction of the current playback is . Press the button if the direction of the current playback is . PLAY FLAT MUSIC STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY To listen to the next selection Press the button if the direction of the current playback is . Press the button if the direction of the current playback is . Flashes on and off. TAPE PROGRAM USER POWER SLEEP INPUT VOLUME Moves rapidly in the direction of the current playback while searching. Notes • This function may not work for tapes with * Material with long pauses or quiet passages. * Low recording levels or excessive noise. * Pauses of less than 4 seconds between selections. • If searching is carried out at the first or the last part of a selection, the desired selection may not be found. E-33 English TAPE DECK OPERATION TAPE DECK OPERATION Continuous playback DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE 1 SEEK PTY DIS T 2 DISC STAR 3 /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC MO PL The reverse MODE selector button can be operated before or during playback, and changes tape playback as follows: VOLUME UP INPUT DOWN UP TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE NORMAL MODE HIGH DOLBY NR POWER If the reverse mode “ ” is not selected, press the reverse MODE selector button to select it. AY A/B/C/D/E INPUT 2 IT AT CD MEMORY Load the tapes into the deck 1 and deck 2 cassette compartments. ED DE REPE OM RAND DOWN USER 1 DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR PLAYBACK MIN 2 1 REC/PLAYBACK <Tape 1> Tape 1 Side A → B → Tape 2 Side A → B (Repeats 8 times) Starts from Tape 1 Side A. EJECT EJECT 1 2 4 3 3 1 2 CD 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 6 7 8 5 0 A B C D E PROG TAPE EDIT +I0 MODE REPEAT REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 CENTER/REAR /DELAY TEST RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER LEVEL PLAY FLAT MUSIC 1 PRESET 9 STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY 4 TAPE PROGRAM USER POWER SLEEP Tape 1 Side A → B → Tape 2 Side A → B (Repeats 8 times) Starts from Tape 1 Side B. (Tape 1 Side A is not played back at the first time.) 5 TIME DISC SKIP <Tape 1> INPUT VOLUME E-34 3 Select the tape to be played back first by pressing the TAPE 1/2 input selector button or the TAPE 1/2 button. 4 Press the play button on the remote control transmitter to listen to side A, or the play button for side B. * When using the play button on the front panel: Pressing the button once begins playback in the direction currently selected. Pressing the play button once more changes the tape direction and begins playback. English RECORDING COMPACT DISCS General information 6 1 • 6 • • DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE 1 SEEK PTY T 2 DISC STAR 3 /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC RAND MO DIS VOLUME A/B/C/D/E DOWN MEMORY • UP INPUT DOWN UP TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE NORMAL MODE HIGH DOLBY NR POWER AY AT CD INPUT USER PL IT ED DE REPE OM DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC • MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR PLAYBACK MIN 2 1 REC/PLAYBACK When recording important selections, be sure to make a preliminary test to ensure that the desired source material is being properly recorded with good sound quality. The automatic recording level control circuit automatically controls the level of the input signal used for recording. Adjusting the VOLUME control has no effect on the recorded sound. If, however, the built-in graphic equalizer and/or sound field processor is used, its effect is recorded along with the source. * Music with an equalizer effect is suitable for listening to inside a car etc. For the tape deck, the deck which can be used for recording is deck 2 only. When recording, be sure to load a tape into the deck 2 cassette compartment. Recording cannot be done if the tape deck is selected as the playback source. CD synchronized recording EJECT EJECT 3 4 5 1 2 CD 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 6 7 8 9 0 A B C D E TAPE EDIT +I0 TIME PROG MODE REPEAT REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 CENTER/REAR /DELAY TEST LEVEL 5 5 PRESET RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER DISC SKIP 5 2 PLAY FLAT MUSIC STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY 1 Press the CD input selector button and load the disc to be recorded. 2 Load a tape into the deck 2 cassette compartment. * Wind past the beginning part of the tape on which recording cannot be performed. 3 When recording with the Dolby NR system, press the DOLBY NR button so that “ B” lights up on the display. If not, turn it off. * For details, refer to the “Dolby B Type Noise Reduction” on page 31. 4 If desired, switch the reverse mode by pressing the reverse MODE selector button. When the tape is set so that side A faces you, recording will be done as follows automatically according to the selected reverse mode. 6 TAPE PROGRAM USER POWER SLEEP INPUT VOLUME 1 E-35 Side A only Side A → Side B Side B only Side B only 5 Press the REC/PAUSE button. * “REC” lights up on the display. 6 Start CD playback by pressing the corresponding DISC selector button, or by pressing the play/pause / button if the disc is already selected. * Before CD playback begins, recording automatically begins on the side of the tape now selected. RECORDING COMPACT DISCS To stop recording temporarily 1 2 / DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE 1 SEEK PTY T 2 DISC STAR 3 /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC RAND MO Choose the selection to be recorded next by using the or button, and then press the play/pause / button of the CD player to resume recording (or simply press the track number input button on the remote control transmitter). To stop recording AY Press the stop button of the tape deck. (At this time, CD playback will not stop.) AT REPE OM VOLUME A/B/C/D/E DOWN MEMORY UP INPUT UP TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE NORMAL MODE HIGH DOLBY NR POWER PL button of the CD player. CD INPUT DOWN USER DIS IT ED DE Press the stop DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC Recording programmed tracks MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR PLAYBACK MIN 2 1 Programmed tracks from one or more discs can also be recorded in the same way. REC/PLAYBACK EJECT EJECT 1 2 CD 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 6 7 8 5 9 C D E TAPE EDIT +I0 MODE REPEAT Press the play/pause / button of the CD player. RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER DISC SKIP LEVEL Follow steps 2–5 on the previous page. 0 B PROG TEST 2 3 Notes • During CD Synchronized Recording, when more than 4 seconds elapse between tracks, the tape will stop automatically and resume recording when the beginning of the next track is found. • The CD Synchronized Recording will function even when the CD player is turned into random play mode. 5 A CENTER/REAR /DELAY Program desired tracks from one or more discs. (Refer to page 20 for the programming procedure.) PRESET TIME REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 1 PLAY FLAT MUSIC STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY / TAPE PROGRAM USER POWER SLEEP INPUT VOLUME Returning the tape to the point where the recording started automatically (REC RETURN function) * This function is available to all recording methods. During recording, by only pressing the or button, you can rewind the tape to the point where the recording started automatically. button when the play direction indicator • Press the is lit up. button when the play direction indicator • Press the is lit up. E-36 1 6 Recording CD(s) on both sides of a tape automatically 1 1 Press the CD input selector button and load the disc to be recorded. 2 3 4 Select the disc by pressing the DISC SKIP button. 5 If the reverse mode “ ” is not selected, press the reverse MODE selector button to select it. 6 Press the EDIT button. (“EDIT” appears on the display.) CD playback and recording starts. Recording is carried out on side A and B of the tape continuously. * If the tape has not rewound to the end, it is rewound to the end rapidly before recording starts. Recording starts from the first part of the tape on which recording can be done. * “A ” (or “ B”) on the display shows the side of the tape on which recording is being carried out. * When the recording on side A finishes while a track is being played back, the sound is automatically faded out, and then the recording stops. The recording on side B starts from the beginning of the same track. DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE 1 SEEK PTY 2 DISC DIS T STAR 3 /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC RAND MO IT ED DE AT REPE OM VOLUME CD DOWN INPUT UP INPUT UP MEMORY TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE NORMAL MODE HIGH DOLBY NR POWER AY A/B/C/D/E DOWN USER PL DUBBING PHONES Load a tape into the deck 2 cassette compartment. When recording with the Dolby NR system, press the DOLBY NR button so that “ B” lights up on the display. If not, turn it off. * For details, refer to the “Dolby B Type Noise Reduction” on page 31. TIMER REC MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR PLAYBACK MIN 1 2 REC/PLAYBACK EJECT 4 EJECT 5 3 Notes • When this CD player is in the all disc play mode, if the tape’s total possible recording time is longer than the total playing time of the selected disc, tracks on another disc are recorded continuously. In this case, as many as three discs can be recorded automatically. • During recording, the DISC CHANGE button on the CD player is disabled. • The CD player’s repeat play mode will be canceled during this recording mode. 6 2 1 2 CD 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 6 7 8 5 5 PRESET 9 0 A B C D E TIME PROG TAPE EDIT +I0 MODE REPEAT RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER DISC SKIP REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 CENTER/REAR /DELAY TEST LEVEL 1 PLAY FLAT MUSIC STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY Recording programmed tracks TAPE PROGRAM Programmed tracks from one or more discs can also be recorded in the same way. USER POWER SLEEP INPUT VOLUME 1 1 Program desired tracks from one or more discs. (Refer to page 20 for the programming procedure.) 2 Follow steps 3–6 described above. To cancel this function Before recording, press the stop or the tape deck. button of the CD player To stop recording Press the stop button of the tape deck. (At this time, CD playback automatically stops.) E-37 English RECORDING COMPACT DISCS RECORDING COMPACT DISCS Automatic tape-editing 1 7 1 This convenient feature can be used to program tracks on a disc (or discs) for recording to tape. By only memorizing the tape’s total possible recording time, the unit will automatically program tracks or help you to program tracks so they will fit onto the tape with the least amount of unrecorded space remaining at each end of the tape. DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE 1 SEEK PTY T 2 DISC STAR 3 /RT/CT Q FRE PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC PS/PTY RAND MO DIS OM VOLUME A/B/C/D/E DOWN INPUT MEMORY UP 1 Press the CD input selector button and load a disc to be recorded. 2 3 4 Select the disc by pressing the DISC SKIP button. 5 If the reverse mode “ ” is not selected, press the reverse MODE selector button to select it. 6 Press the TAPE button on the remote control transmitter to select the length of the tape to be used. Whenever pressed, C-46, C-54, C-60 and C-90 appear on the display in turn, and next it returns to the normal display mode. INPUT UP TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE NORMAL MODE HIGH DOLBY NR POWER To record a disc with the order of tracks unchanged AY AT CD DOWN USER PL IT ED DE REPE DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR PLAYBACK MIN 2 1 REC/PLAYBACK EJECT EJECT 4 5 3 Load a tape into the deck 2 cassette compartment. When recording with the Dolby NR system, press the DOLBY NR button so that “ B” lights up on the display. If not, turn it off. * For details, refer to the “Dolby B Type Noise Reduction” on page 31. → (off) 6 6 7 1 2 CD 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 6 7 8 5 0 A B C D E PROG TAPE EDIT +I0 MODE REPEAT RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER DISC SKIP REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 2 5 TIME CENTER/REAR /DELAY TEST LEVEL PLAY FLAT MUSIC STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY TAPE PROGRAM 7 1 USER POWER SLEEP INPUT VOLUME C-60 → C-90 When using tapes other than C-46, C-54, C-60 or C-90 When C-46, C-54, C-60 or C-90 is appearing on the display, input the tape length by using the track number input buttons on the remote control transmitter (Examples) C-62: Press “6” and then “2”. C-30: Press “3” and then “0”, or press “+10” three times and then “0”. PRESET 9 → C-46 → C-54 → 1 Press the EDIT button. (“EDIT” appears on the display.) The following internal operations are carried out before recording is automatically started. * If the tape has not rewound to the end, it is rewound to the end rapidly before recording starts. 1)Tracks on the disc are automatically divided between side A and side B. You can check the process by watching the display. 2)The end part of the tape on which recording cannot be done is wound. 3)CD playback and recording starts. Recording is carried out on both side A and B of the tape. E-38 Notes • When this CD player is in the all disc play mode, if the tape’s total possible recording time is longer than the total playing time of the selected disc, tracks on another disc are recorded continuously. In this case, as many as three discs can be recorded automatically. • The CD player’s repeat play mode will be canceled during this recording mode. 4 DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE 1 SEEK PTY T 2 DISC STAR 3 /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PROGRAM RA PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC MO DIS Before recording, press the stop or the tape deck. VOLUME DOWN UP INPUT UP MEMORY To stop recording TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE NORMAL MODE HIGH DOLBY NR Press the stop button of the tape deck. (At this time, CD playback automatically stops.) DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR PLAYBACK MIN 1 2 REC/PLAYBACK EJECT To make this unit program tracks on a disc automatically so that the least amount of unrecorded space remains on the tape EJECT 1 2 3 2 1 2 CD 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 6 7 8 9 0 A B C D E TAPE EDIT +I0 TIME PROG MODE REPEAT REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 CENTER/REAR /DELAY TEST LEVEL 5 5 PRESET PLAY FLAT MUSIC STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY 4 4 TAPE PROGRAM USER POWER SLEEP Follow steps 1– 6 on the previous page. Press the PROG button. Press the TAPE button. “AP- A> ” will light up during programming for side A, and “AP- B> ” will light up during programming for side B. * After “AP- B> ” goes out from the display, you can check the programmed contents for side A and B respectively. To check, cancel or correct program data, refer to page 21. RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER DISC SKIP 3 button of the CD player CD INPUT POWER To cancel tape-editing function AY AT A/B/C/D/E DOWN USER PL IT ED DE REPE NDOM INPUT VOLUME E-39 Press the EDIT button. (“EDIT” appears on the display.) The recording is automatically started. English RECORDING COMPACT DISCS RECORDING COMPACT DISCS 1 9 To record programmed tracks from one or more discs 1 1 Press the CD input selector button and load a disc (or discs) on the disc table. 2 3 Follow steps 3–6 on page 38. 4 If necessary, select a desired disc by pressing the DISC SKIP button. 5 Select the desired track number by pressing the track number input buttons. 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to program more selections for the side A of the tape. You can select the same track again. * Pressing the TIME button displays the total remaining time on the side of the tape for about 1 second, and then it is replaced by the display of the next playback order. * If “TM OVER” appears on the display, the track number just selected cannot be programmed because there is not enough time remaining on the side A of the tape. However, at this time, if any other track number is flashing continuously on the display, you can program it instead of the unprogrammable one. 7 After you finish the programming for the side A, press the TAPE button. * “PU SET” appears on the display, then you can begin programming for side B. * After this step is done, you can check the programmed contents for side A and side B alternately by pressing the TAPE button at any time before you press the EDIT button in step 9. 8 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to program selections for the side B of the tape. You can select the same track again. * If “TM OVER” appears on the display, the track number just selected cannot be programmed because there is not enough time remaining on the side B of the tape. However, at this time, if any other track number is flashing continuously on the display, you can program it instead of the unprogrammable one. 9 Press the EDIT button. (“EDIT” appears on the display.) The recording is automatically started. DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE 1 SEEK PTY T 2 DISC STAR 3 /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC RAND MO DIS IT ED DE AT REPE VOLUME A/B/C/D/E UP INPUT UP MEMORY TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE MODE NORMAL HIGH DOLBY NR DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ TIME 3 7 4 1 2 CD 3 1 2 3 6 7 8 6 7 8 4 4 5 5 PRESET 9 B C D E PROG TAPE EDIT +I0 MODE REPEAT REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 CENTER/REAR /DELAY TEST LEVEL 5 0 A TIME RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER DISC SKIP PLAY FLAT MUSIC STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY 9 1 1 TAPE PROGRAM USER POWER SLEEP INPUT VOLUME Display information during programming Selected disc GRAM HALL TAPE 1 USER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 B 13 14 15 OVER 15 TRACK PROG A Next playback order VOLUME Side of the tape Notes on tape-editing If programs are made selecting tracks from more than one disc, during recording, the DISC CHANGE button on the CD player is disabled. • To check, cancel or correct program data, refer to page 21. • The maximum number of tracks that can be programmed is 20. • This function can be used to program up to track number 15. If the disc has more than 15 tracks, track number 16 and thereafter will not be programmed. • Programmed track numbers light up and unprogrammed ones flash. RAM HALL TAPE 1 USER B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 REM 13 14 15 OVER 15 TRACK PROG A Selected track number Press the PROG button. * “PROG” and “P-01” will light up on the display, and all track numbers on the selected disc will begin flashing. OM DOWN INPUT POWER AY CD DOWN USER PL VOLUME Total remaining time on the side of the tape E-40 General information • 1 • • DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE 1 SEEK PTY T 2 DISC STAR 3 /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PROGRAM RA PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC MO DIS VOLUME A/B/C/D/E • CD INPUT UP INPUT DOWN UP MEMORY TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE NORMAL MODE HIGH DOLBY NR POWER AY AT DOWN USER PL IT ED DE REPE NDOM DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC When recording important selections, be sure to make a preliminary test to ensure that the desired source material is being properly recorded with good sound quality. The automatic recording level control circuit automatically controls the level of the input signal used for recording. Adjusting the VOLUME control has no effect on the recorded sound. If, however, the built-in graphic equalizer and/or sound field processor is used, its effect is recorded along with the source. * Music with an equalizer effect is suitable for listening to inside a car etc. For the tape deck, the deck which can be used for recording is deck 2 only. When recording, be sure to load a tape into the deck 2 cassette compartment. MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR PLAYBACK MIN 2 1 REC/PLAYBACK Recording from the built-in tuner EJECT 4 7, 2 EJECT 5 6, 1 1 2 CD 3 1 2 3 6 7 8 6 7 8 4 5 9 0 A B C D E PROG TAPE EDIT +I0 MODE REPEAT RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 CENTER/REAR /DELAY TEST LEVEL PLAY FLAT MUSIC STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY 2 Tune to the desired station. (Refer to the “TUNING OPERATION” on page 24 and 25.) 3 4 Load a tape into the deck 2 cassette compartment. 5 Select the reverse mode “ ” to record on only one side, or “ ” for continuous recording on both sides by pressing the reverse MODE selector button. 6 Press the REC/PAUSE button. * “REC” lights up on the display. 7 Press the play button on the remote control transmitter to record on side A, or the play button to record on side B. * For continuous recording on both sides, begin on side A. Recording stops automatically at the end of side B. 1 When recording with the Dolby NR system, press the DOLBY NR button so that “ B” lights up on the display. If not, turn it off. * For details, refer to the “Dolby B Type Noise Reduction” on page 31. TAPE PROGRAM To stop recording temporarily USER POWER SLEEP Press the INPUT selector or button once or more so that “TUNER” appears on the display. 5 PRESET TIME DISC SKIP 6, 1 4 3 1 1 2 INPUT VOLUME Press the REC/PAUSE button. To resume recording, press the play button. To stop recording Press the stop button. To reduce beats during recording While recording an AM (long wave) broadcast, you may hear a bleep caused by beat frequencies. In such a case, pressing the TUNER input selector button on the remote control transmitter once or more will reduce or remove beats. (Whenever the TUNER input selector button is pressed, “B.C–1” and “B.C–2” appears on the display alternately. Select either of them in which you find that beats are more reduced.) E-41 English OTHER RECORDINGS OTHER RECORDINGS Dubbing • 1 2 • DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 During dubbing, adjusting the VOLUME control and using the built-in graphic equalizer and the sound field processor have no effect on the recorded sound. Try to use the same tape formula and length for the recording tape as for the master tape. OPEN/CLOSE 1 SEEK PTY T 2 DISC STAR 3 /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC RAND MO Select the reverse mode “ ” to record on only one side, or “ ” for continuous recording on both sides by pressing the reverse MODE selector button. 4 Press the DUBBING button. * Press “NORMAL” to dub at normal speed, and “HIGH” to dub at about twice the normal speed. * Dubbing will begin from side A regardless of the side now selected. AT VOLUME DOWN MEMORY 3 IT ED DE REPE UP INPUT UP TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE NORMAL MODE HIGH DOLBY NR DUBBING PHONES Load a prerecorded tape into the deck 1 cassette compartment. Insert a blank tape into the deck 2 cassette compartment. OM A/B/C/D/E INPUT POWER PL Press the TAPE 1/2 input selector button. AY CD DOWN USER DIS 1 2 TIMER REC MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR PLAYBACK MIN 2 1 REC/PLAYBACK EJECT To stop dubbing EJECT Press the stop button. * Tape 1 and tape 2 will stop at the same time. 2 3, 3 4 4 1 2 CD 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 6 7 8 4 5 5 9 B C D E PROG TAPE EDIT +I0 MODE REPEAT REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 TEST RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER LEVEL PLAY FLAT MUSIC STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY PROGRAM 1 Load the tape to be erased into the deck 2 cassette compartment. 2 Press the INPUT selector or button once or more and select an input source position of external unit (MD/AUX, VCR or LD/TV). * Make sure that there is no sound output from the selected external unit. 3 Select the reverse mode “ ” to erase only one side or “ ” to erase both sides by pressing the reverse MODE selector button. 4 Press the REC/PAUSE button, then press the play button on the remote control transmitter to erase side A of the tape, or the play button to erase side B. USER INPUT VOLUME 4 TAPE POWER SLEEP Erasing recorded tapes 0 A CENTER/REAR /DELAY Note Only tapes originally encoded with Dolby NR will be dubbed onto tapes with Dolby NR encoding. Even if the Dolby NR is on, it will have no effect on the recording of tape 2 during dubbing. However, the playback tonal quality of tape 1 will change according to whether the Dolby NR button is on or off. PRESET TIME DISC SKIP 2, 1 1, 2 E-42 To listen to or watch a source on an external unit connected with this system 1 Press the INPUT selector or button once or more 1, 1 and select the position of input source (MD/AUX, VCR or LD/TV) you will play back confirming it on the display. * The names of input source positions correspond with the names of terminals to connect with external units on the rear of the main unit. DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE 1 SEEK PTY T 2 DISC STAR 3 /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PROGRAM RA PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC MO DIS DOWN UP INPUT UP MEMORY 2 Play back the source. (For a video source, turn the monitor TV on.) 3 Adjust the volume to a desired level by using the VOLUME control. If you prefer, use the graphic equalizer and/or the sound field processor built into this system. VOLUME A/B/C/D/E INPUT TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE NORMAL MODE HIGH DOLBY NR POWER AY AT CD DOWN USER PL IT ED DE REPE NDOM DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR PLAYBACK MIN 2 1 REC/PLAYBACK EJECT EJECT 3, 2 1 2 CD 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 6 7 8 5 5 9 0 A B C D E PROG TAPE EDIT +I0 MODE REPEAT RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER DISC SKIP REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 TEST LEVEL Not only a source played back on this system, but also a source played back on an external unit can be recorded by the built-in tape deck and/or a VCR, DAT, etc. connected with this system. * If you make a recording on the built-in tape deck, read “General information” on page 41 before starting recording. PRESET TIME CENTER/REAR /DELAY To record a source to tape PLAY FLAT MUSIC STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY TAPE PROGRAM INPUT VOLUME Select the source to be recorded by the INPUT selector or button. 2 Play back the source and then turn the VOLUME control up to confirm the input source. 3 Begin recording on the built-in tape deck or a VCR etc. connected with this system. * To make a recording on the built-in tape deck, follow steps 3–7 on page 41. To stop recording or to stop recording temporarily, also refer to page 41. USER POWER SLEEP 1 1, 1 3, 2 Note If the built-in graphic equalizer and/or sound field processor is used, its effect is recorded along with the source when you make recording on the following recording units. ● The built-in tape deck. ● The external recording unit connected to the MD/AUX terminals on the rear of the main unit. However, the effect of the graphic equalizer and/or sound field processor cannot be recorded when you make recording on the external recording unit connected to the VCR terminals on the rear of the main unit. E-43 English OPERATING EXTERNAL UNITS CONNECTED WITH THIS SYSTEM USING GRAPHIC EQUALIZER The built-in graphic equalizer presents you with the pleasure of listening to music with various sound effects. This system provides 4 preset equalizer modes as listed right. You can enjoy listening to music with a desired sound effect by selecting one of these modes. In addition, the built-in 5 band graphic equalizer allows you to adjust the equalizer pattern to create an effect for your desired sound taste. MUSIC ROCK BLUES RAP JAZZ Preset graphic equalizer modes (MUSIC) High and low frequencies are emphasized. This mode is suitable for reproducing dynamic and powerful sounds of rock music etc. BLUES Low and medium frequencies are moderately emphasized. This mode is suitable for music with a blue feeling. RAP Low and mid-high frequencies are emphasized so that vocals become wellmodulated. This mode is suitable for rap music etc. JAZZ Medium frequencies for vocals, piano, sax, etc. are emphasized. High and low frequencies are also emphasized moderately. Listening to the music with a preset equalizer effect DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE 1 SEEK PTY DIS T 2 STAR 3 /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC RAND MO PL AY IT ED DE AT REPE OM VOLUME A/B/C/D/E 1 Play back a source. (For source playback, refer to the sections beginning on page 17.) 2 Press the MUSIC button once or more so that the name of a desired mode appears on the preset equalizer mode indicator. * Whenever you press the MUSIC button, the preset mode changes and is displayed as follows. CD DOWN INPUT UP INPUT DOWN MEMORY UP TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE MODE NORMAL ROCK HIGH DOLBY NR POWER ROCK 1K 3.5K 10K 2 USER Feature PROGRAM USER PRO LOGIC HALL ARENA 1 2 34 3 STEREO 100 350 DISC Mode DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC AUTO/MAN’L MEMORY Active Servo BLUES RAP JAZZ Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR PLAYBACK MIN 1 2 REC/PLAYBACK OFF MUSIC ROCK BLUES RAP JAZZ 1 2 CD 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 6 EJECT 7 8 EJECT 9 0 A B C D E PROG TAPE EDIT +I0 MODE REPEAT CENTER/REAR /DELAY TEST LEVEL Note An equalizer effect is also be recorded along with a source when recording on the built-in tape deck. RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER DISC SKIP 2 5 TIME REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 * The equalizer pattern of the selected mode is shown on the graphic equalizer level indicators. 5 PRESET PLAY FLAT MUSIC STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY TAPE PROGRAM USER POWER SLEEP INPUT VOLUME E-44 Adjusting the graphic equalizer for your desired sound taste 3 The 5 band graphic equalizer allows you to adjust the level for each frequency band. * Make adjustment by monitoring the equalizer level indicators on the display. DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE 1 SEEK PTY DIS T 2 DISC STAR 3 /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC RAND MO 2 Press the equalizer control or button once or more to select the frequency band to which you will adjust the level. * The selected frequency band is shown on the display. * The scale bar of the selected frequency band on the graphic equalizer level indicators will flash. 3 Press the equalizer control more to adjust the level. 4 In the same way, make adjustment for other frequency band. OM VOLUME A/B/C/D/E DOWN UP INPUT DOWN UP MEMORY TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE NORMAL MODE HIGH DOLBY NR POWER AY AT Play back a source. (For source playback, refer to the sections beginning on page 17.) CD INPUT USER PL IT ED DE REPE 1 DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC AUTO/MAN’L MEMORY Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR PLAYBACK MIN 1 2 REC/PLAYBACK 2 EJECT or button once or EJECT 100 350 Note on Australia, China, Singapore and General models only If the KARAOKE (including L and R ONLY) program is selected, cancel it or select another sound field program. 1K 3.5K 10K Turning the equalizer to “flat” (the state with no equalization applied) 1 2 CD 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 6 7 8 5 5 PRESET 9 0 A B C D E TIME PROG TAPE EDIT +I0 MODE REPEAT RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER DISC SKIP REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 CENTER/REAR /DELAY TEST LEVEL By one of the following methods, the settings of preset graphic equalizer mode (MUSIC) and sound field program (PROGRAM) are turned off and the equalizer pattern is turned to “flat”. • Press the FLAT button on the remote control transmitter. * Pressing the FLAT button once more will restore the state before the equalizer was turned to “flat”. • Press the MUSIC button and the PROGRAM button on the front panel at the same time. * There is no way to restore the state before the equalizer was turned to “flat”. PLAY FLAT MUSIC STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY TAPE PROGRAM USER FLAT POWER SLEEP INPUT VOLUME E-45 English USING GRAPHIC EQUALIZER USING SOUND FIELD PROCESSOR The Sound Field Processor built into this system presents you with the ambience of an actual concert hall etc. by adding effects as sonic reflections or reberverations that create the sound environment of a hall etc. This system provides preset sound field programs shown below. You can enjoy an excellent audio sound field by selecting one of them, and adding desired adjustments. This system incorporates a Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder for multi-channel sound reproduction of Dolby Surround encoded video sources. The operation of the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder can be controlled by selecting a corresponding sound field program. MUSIC ROCK BLUES RAP JAZZ PROGRAM USER PRO LOGIC HALL ARENA 1 2 3 STEREO KARAOKE L R 3 4 Brief Overview of Sound Field Programs PROGRAM PRO LOGIC 3 STEREO FEATURE This program is used for playback of sources encoded with Dolby Surround. Sounds are reproduced as movie creaters designed by using five speakers. You can experience the dramatic realism and impact of a movie theater. This program is effective not only for playback of sources encoded with Dolby Surround, but also for sources not encoded with Dolby Surround or TV programs with 2-channel stereo sound. With this program, 2-channel stereo sound is converted into 3-channels (left front, center and right front), so the dialogs are emphasized on the center position by the use of the center speaker. As no sound is output from the rear speakers, this program is also effective in a simple Audio/Video system without rear speakers. HALL In this program, the center will appear to be deep behind the front speakers, creating an expansive large hall ambience. Orchestra and opera music are suited for this sound field. ARENA This program simulates the sound environment of a big hall with long reverberation time and many reflections of high frequencies. KARAOKE (KARAOKE L) (KARAOKE R) These programs are available on Australia, China, Singapore and General models only. (Refer to page 51 for karaoke operation.) * Programs on the shaded area are available on Australia, China, Singapore and General models only. E-46 Listening to the music with a sound field effect 2 1 Play back a source. (For source playback, refer to the sections beginning on page 17.) 2 Press the PROGRAM button once or more so that the name of a desired program appears on the sound field program indicator. * Whenever you press the PROGRAM button, the program changes and is displayed as follows. DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE 1 SEEK PTY DIS T 2 DISC STAR 3 /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC RAND MO PL AT VOLUME A/B/C/D/E CD DOWN INPUT HALL KARAOKE TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE NORMAL MODE HIGH DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC AUTO/MAN’L MEMORY Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR MIN PLAYBACK 1 2 PRO LOGIC EJECT OFF 3 1 2 CD 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 6 7 8 5 9 B C D E PROG TAPE EDIT +I0 MODE REPEAT CENTER/REAR /DELAY TEST LEVEL Notes ● When HALL or ARENA is selected, no sound is heard from the center speaker. 0 A RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER PLAY FLAT MUSIC STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY TAPE PROGRAM ● When a monaural sound source is played with DOLBY PRO LOGIC or DOLBY 3 STEREO, no sound is heard from the front speakers and the rear speakers. Sound is heard only from the center speaker. For DOLBY PRO LOGIC only, however, if the center channel mode is in “PHANTOM”, the front speakers output the sound of the center channel. 2 USER POWER SLEEP If desired, adjust the delay time and the output level of each speaker. (For details, refer to the corresponding descriptions on page 48–49.) 5 PRESET TIME DISC SKIP KARAOKE R (R ONLY) * Programs on the shaded areas are available on Australia, China, Singapore and General models only. EJECT REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 KARAOKE L (L ONLY) REC/PLAYBACK PROGRAM PRO LOGIC HALL ARENA 3 STEREO KARAOKE L R 3 ARENA UP MEMORY DOLBY NR POWER 3 STEREO UP INPUT DOWN USER AY IT ED DE REPE OM INPUT VOLUME ● A sound field effect is also be recorded along with a source when recording on the built-in tape deck. E-47 English USING SOUND FIELD PROCESSOR USING SOUND FIELD PROCESSOR Adjusting CENTER LEVEL If desired, you can adjust the sound output level of the center speaker even if the output level is already set in “SPEAKER BALANCE ADJUSTMENT” on page 15–16. 1 2 CD 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 6 7 8 9 0 A B C D E PROG TAPE EDIT +I0 MODE REPEAT CENTER/REAR /DELAY TEST LEVEL 1 Press the CENTER/REAR/DELAY selector button once or more so that “CENT” appears on the display. 2 By continuously pressing the LEVEL control + or – button, the level value changes continuously. RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER DISC SKIP 1 5 TIME REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 Control range : +10 to –21 5 PRESET PLAY FLAT MUSIC STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY TAPE PROGRAM USER POWER SLEEP 2 INPUT VOLUME Notes ● This adjustment can be made only when the sound field program DOLBY PRO LOGIC or DOLBY 3 STEREO is selected. ● Once the output level is adjusted, the level value will be the same in the DOLBY PRO LOGIC and DOLBY 3 STEREO programs. Adjusting REAR LEVEL If desired, you can adjust the sound output level of the rear speakers even if the output level is already set in “SPEAKER BALANCE ADJUSTMENT” on page 15–16. Control range : +10 to –21 1 Press the CENTER/REAR/DELAY selector button once or more so that “REAR” appears on the display. 2 By continuously pressing the LEVEL control + or – button, the level value changes continuously. Notes ● This adjustment can be made when a sound field program except DOLBY 3 STEREO is selected. ● Adjustment can be made to DOLBY PRO LOGIC, HALL and ARENA individually. E-48 Adjusting DELAY TIME 1 2 CD 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 6 7 8 5 9 0 A B C D E PROG TAPE EDIT +I0 MODE REPEAT RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER DISC SKIP 1 5 PRESET TIME REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 CENTER/REAR /DELAY TEST LEVEL You can adjust the time difference between the beginning of the source sound and the beginning of the effect sound. This adjustment can be made to all programs (except DOLBY 3 STEREO) individually. By applying more or less delay, sound effects, background noise, and ambient noise coming at you from the rear speakers can be enhanced or subdued for extra effect. PLAY FLAT MUSIC STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY Control range PRO LOGIC : 15, 20, 25, 30 milliseconds HALL, ARENA : 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50 milliseconds TAPE PROGRAM USER POWER SLEEP 2 INPUT VOLUME 1 Press the CENTER/REAR/DELAY selector button once or more so that “DEL” appears on the display. 2 By continuously pressing the LEVEL control + or – button, the value changes continuously. The value stops changing momentarily at the preset point. Adjustable Notes ● When DOLBY 3 STEREO is selected, this adjustment cannot be made. ● Adding too much delay will cause an unnatural effect with some sources. ● When the LEVEL control button is pressed, sound is momentarily interrupted. Note The values of the delay time, center level and rear level you set the last time will remain memorized even when the power of this unit is off. However, if the power cord is kept disconnected for more than one week, these values will be automatically changed back to the original factory settings. E-49 English USING SOUND FIELD PROCESSOR STORING YOUR OWN PROGRAMS 2 1 Your favorite pair of any equalizer mode (or an equalizer pattern of your own adjusting) and any sound field program can be stored as a user program. Up to 4 pairs can be stored as desired. 1 DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 To store OPEN/CLOSE 1 SEEK PTY T 2 DISC STAR 3 /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC RAND MO Select a desired sound field program by pressing the PROGRAM button. 3 Press the user program MEMORY button. * “1” will flash on the user program number indicator and the MEMORY indicator will flash for about 5 seconds. 4 Select the user program number (1, 2, 3 or 4) to which you will store the selected modes by pressing the USER button once or more before “1” stops flashing. * Whenever you press the USER button, the user program number changes and is displayed as follows. AT VOLUME A/B/C/D/E DOWN UP UP MEMORY TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE MODE NORMAL HIGH DOLBY NR DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC AUTO/MAN’L MEMORY Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR MIN PLAYBACK 4, 2 2 AY IT ED DE REPE INPUT DOWN POWER PL Select a desired equalizer mode by pressing the MUSIC button. * If desired, adjust the equalizer as you prefer by using the equalizer control buttons. OM CD INPUT USER DIS 1 1 2 REC/PLAYBACK USER 12 34 3, 5 EJECT EJECT USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 USER 4 5 1 2 CD 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 6 7 8 5 B C D E PROG TAPE EDIT +I0 MODE REPEAT CENTER/REAR /DELAY TEST LEVEL * In the same way, store other pairs to other three user positions. 0 A RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER DISC SKIP PLAY FLAT MUSIC STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY * It is also a good idea to store only an equalizer pattern of your own adjusting (without storing any sound field program). 2 TAPE PROGRAM USER POWER SLEEP Press the user program MEMORY button before the number selected in step 4 stops flashing. PRESET 9 TIME REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 1 5 4, 2 Notes • A new program can be stored in place of the former one. • In step 4 or 5, if the user program number indicator stops flashing before operation, return to step 3. INPUT VOLUME To recall a user program 1 Play back a source. (For source playback, refer to the sections beginning on page 17.) 2 Press the USER button once or more so that the user program number you want to recall lights up. * Whenever you press the USER button, the user program number changes and is displayed as follows. USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 OFF E-50 USER 4 Singing karaoke This system allows you to enjoy singing karaoke by using not only a source for karaoke use but also any normal audio source. 1 MIC MIC MIXING MIN 1 Connect one or two microphones to the MIC jack(s) on the front panel. 2 Play back a source. (For source playback, refer to the sections beginning on page 17.) 3 If necessary, select a karaoke mode (KARAOKE, KARAOKE L or KARAOKE R) by pressing the PROGRAM button once or more so that the corresponding name appears on the sound field program indicator. For descriptions of the karaoke modes, see the list below. 4 Only when the KARAOKE (including L and R ONLY) mode is selected, echo effect is automatically applied. Adjust the echo effect level by pressing the ECHO or button. If you need no echo effect, adjust the level to minimum. * On the remote control transmitter, pressing the LEVEL control buttons adjusts the echo effect level. 5 While singing, adjust the mixing level of singing voice by turning the MIC MIXING level control. MAX DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE 1 SEEK PTY DIS T 2 DISC STAR 3 /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC RAND MO DE INPUT ECHO USER VOLUME A/B/C/D/E DOWN MEMORY UP INPUT UP TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE Active Servo NORMAL MODE Technology HIGH DOLBY NR POWER AY CD DOWN ECHO PL IT ED AT REPE OM MIC DUBBING PHONES MIC MIXING TIMER REC AUTO/MAN’L MEMORY TIMER To cancel the karaoke mode TIME ADJ HOUR MIN MIN PLAYBACK 2 1 MAX Press the PROGRAM button so that “KARAOKE”, “KARAOKE L” or “KARAOKE R” disappears from the sound field program indicator. REC/PLAYBACK Karaoke modes (PROGRAM) EJECT 3 EJECT 4 Feature KARAOKE Medium frequencies of the source sound (vocals etc.) are attenuated. This mode is suitable for singing karaoke using a normal audio source with vocals. Note There may be a case that vocals cannot only be attenuated effectively according to a source. 5 1 2 CD 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 6 7 8 5 5 PRESET 9 0 A B C D E TIME PROG TAPE EDIT +I0 MODE REPEAT REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 CENTER/REAR /DELAY TEST LEVEL (KARAOKE L) Only signals on the left channel of the source are output from the left and right speakers. When using a karaoke source which contains both background music and original vocals on the right channel and background music only on the left channel, selecting this mode is suitable for singing karaoke. (KARAOKE R) Only signals on the right channel of the source are output from the left and right speakers. When using a karaoke source which contains both background music and original vocals on the left channel and background music only on the right channel, selecting this mode is suitable for singing karaoke. RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER DISC SKIP 4 Mode PLAY FLAT MUSIC STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY TAPE PROGRAM 3 USER POWER SLEEP INPUT VOLUME E-51 English KARAOKE OPERATION (Australia, China, Singapore and General models only) HOW TO USE THE BUILT-IN TIMER Timer play By using the built-in timer, you can set the time when the unit turns on and a source begins playing automatically, and the time when the unit turns off automatically. DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE 1 Prepare the source to be played. For tuner: Tune in to the station you will listen to. 1 SEEK PTY DIS T 2 DISC STAR 3 /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC RAND MO For tape deck: Load a tape into the cassette compartment. (If tapes are loaded in both the compartments, tape 1 takes priority of tape 2, and is played back by the timer play.) VOLUME A/B/C/D/E CD INPUT UP INPUT DOWN UP MEMORY TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE MODE NORMAL HIGH DOLBY NR POWER AY AT DOWN USER PL IT ED DE REPE OM DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR MIN PLAYBACK 2 1 For CD player: Load a disc on the disc table. If more than one disc are loaded on the disc table, select the disc by using the DISC selector buttons or the DISC SKIP button. REC/PLAYBACK EJECT 2 EJECT 2-➀ 2-➁ 2 Press the DISPLAY button. Whenever the DISPLAY button is pressed, the display mode changes as follows. At each mode, make a setting for the timer play, referring to the setting procedure described below. 1 2 CD 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 6 7 8 9 0 A B C D E TAPE EDIT +I0 TIME PROG MODE REPEAT CENTER/REAR /DELAY TEST LEVEL 5 PRESET RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER DISC SKIP REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 5 PLAY FLAT MUSIC STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY 2-➁ USER POWER SLEEP INPUT VOLUME ➁ Source selecting mode (TAPE, TUNER, CD) ➂ ON TIME/Time setting mode ➃ OFF TIME/Time setting mode ➄ Normal display mode * The display mode will be changed to the next mode after about 8 seconds elapse automatically. If the mode is changed before the setting is completed, call the mode again by pressing the DISPLAY button once or more. TAPE PROGRAM Current time (TIMER on/off mode) → → → → → ➀ 2-➁ Setting procedure: E-52 ➀ At the display of current time Check to be sure that the current time is correct, and press the TIMER button so that “TIMER” lights up on the display. ➁ At source selecting mode Select the source (TAPE, TUNER or CD) to be played by pressing the corresponding input selector button. * If “TUNER” is selected, soon it is changed to the frequency display mode. In this mode, you can select the station to listen to with the timer play by using the PRESET/TUNING/BAND selector button, A/B/C/D/E button and / buttons. POWER TIMER DISC CHANGE OPEN/CLOSE 1 SEEK PTY T 2 STAR 3 /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC At OFF TIME/time setting mode [“OFF TIME” appears on the display, and soon it is changed to a time setting mode.] If necessary, set to the time when you want to finish the timer play (to turn this unit off) by using the HOUR button and the MIN button. Even if you do not set the time, it has already been set so that the timer play finishes after 1 hour. MO DIS PL * The TIMER button functions also in the time (ON TIME or OFF TIME) setting mode. (However, it also turns off the power.) AY IT ED DE AT VOLUME A/B/C/D/E CD INPUT MEMORY UP INPUT DOWN UP TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE NORMAL MODE HIGH DOLBY NR POWER ➃ REPE OM RAND DOWN USER At ON TIME/time setting mode [“ON TIME” appears on the display, and soon it is changed to a time setting mode.] Set to the time when you want to begin the timer play by using the HOUR button and the MIN button. DISPLAY MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 DISC ➂ DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR PLAYBACK MIN 2 1 3 REC/PLAYBACK EJECT Note If a timer play setting is made and the power is not turned off, the source set for the timer play will begin playing when the time comes in place of the source played at that time. EJECT HOUR If you will not use this unit until the timer play begins, turn the power off by pressing the POWER switch or the TIMER button. MIN To cancel the timer play setting 1 2 CD 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 6 7 8 5 5 PRESET 9 0 A B C D E TIME PROG TAPE EDIT +I0 MODE REPEAT RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER DISC SKIP REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 CENTER/REAR /DELAY TEST LEVEL After the timer play is finished, press the DISPLAY button to call the current time. While the current time is displayed, press the TIMER button so that “TIMER” goes out from the display. If it is not canceled, the system will be turned on at the same time every day, so it can be used as an alarm. However, if you are planning to go out at that time, cancel the timer play setting. * Unless the AC supply lead is unplugged or there is a power failure for more than 5 minutes, the time set on the timer will be retained until it is reset. PLAY FLAT MUSIC STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY TAPE PROGRAM USER POWER SLEEP INPUT VOLUME How to make time setting in the ON TIME or OFF TIME mode POWER For the hour: Press the HOUR button to change the hour to a higher value. Press and hold to change continuously. To change the hour to a lower value, press the button. For the minute: Use the MIN button and operate it in the same way as you did to change the hour. To change the minute to a lower value, press the button. E-53 English HOW TO USE THE BUILT-IN TIMER HOW TO USE THE BUILT-IN TIMER 5 POWER Timer recording (To record a tuner program) DISPLAY DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE 1 SEEK PTY DIS T 2 DISC STAR 3 /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC RAND MO PL AT VOLUME 3 Tune in to the station of which program you want to record. 4 Follow step 2 of the “Timer play” on page 52 and 53. DOWN MEMORY UP INPUT UP TAPE 1/2 REC/PAUSE NORMAL MODE HIGH DOLBY NR DUBBING PHONES TIMER REC MEMORY AUTO/MAN’L Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR PLAYBACK MIN 2 1 REC/PLAYBACK 5 EJECT TIMER REC Press the TIMER button. (The power will be turned off automatically.) * If a normal display mode (the state which had been selected before you began setting the timer recording) is restored before you press the TIMER button, select and follow either of the two methods below. • Press the DISPLAY button, and then press the TIMER button. (The power is still on.) • Press the POWER switch to turn the power off, and then press the TIMER button. (The power is turned off.) EJECT 2 If desired, change the setting of the reverse mode and use the Dolby NR system. * In step ➁, select “TUNER” position, and then press the TIMER REC button. (“REC” will flash on the display.) * In step ➂, set the time when you want to begin the timer recording. * In step ➃, set the time when you want to finish the timer recording. CD INPUT POWER Load a blank tape into the deck 2 cassette compartment. A/B/C/D/E DOWN USER AY IT ED DE REPE OM 1 2 1 To confirm the timer time setting 1 2 CD 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 6 7 8 9 0 A B C D E TIME PROG TAPE EDIT +I0 MODE REPEAT REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 TEST LEVEL To cancel the setting of timer recording Press the DISPLAY button once or more so that “REC” flashes on the display. While “REC” is flashing, press the TIMER REC button. * Unless the AC supply lead is unplugged or there is a power failure for more than 5 minutes, the time set on the timer will be retained until it is reset. RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER DISC SKIP CENTER/REAR /DELAY Press the DISPLAY button. PRESET PLAY FLAT MUSIC STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY TUNER TAPE PROGRAM USER POWER SLEEP INPUT VOLUME Note When the timer recording is finished, the timer setting is automatically canceled to avoid repeating timer recording of the same setting. POWER E-54 English HOW TO USE THE BUILT-IN TIMER Sleep timer operation This unit can be turned off automatically. DISC CHANGE MINI COMPONENT SYSTEM GX–70 OPEN/CLOSE 1 SEEK PTY T 2 STAR 3 /RT/CT PTY Q PS/ FRE PRESET/TUNING/BAND MUSIC RAND MO Press the SLEEP button repeatedly until the desired sleep time appears on the display. The display will change as described below. [Time is displayed by the hour (h) and the minute (m).] AY IT ED DE AT REPE OM A/B/C/D/E NORMAL HIGH DOLBY NR DUBBING PHONES MEMORY Active Servo Technology TIMER TIME ADJ HOUR PLAYBACK MIN 2 1 1h00m 0h30m OFF SLEEP (Sleep timer is off.) TIMER REC AUTO/MAN’L 1h30m ↑ REC/PAUSE MODE ↑ 2h00m ↑ UP UP TAPE 1/2 ↑ DOWN MEMORY Press the SLEEP button. “SLEEP” appears on the display, and soon it is replaced by “2h00m”. VOLUME INPUT DOWN POWER PL 3 CD INPUT USER DIS Play the desired sound source. ↑ DISC PROGRAM 1 2 REC/PLAYBACK * The original display mode will resume about 4 seconds after the selection is made. * The SLEEP indicator will light up to indicate that the sleep timer is on. EJECT EJECT 4 The unit will turn off automatically when the selected sleep time passes. POWER To confirm the sleep time setting Press the SLEEP button once. “SLEEP” appears on the display, and soon it is replaced by the remaining time of the selected sleep time. To change the sleep time 1 2 CD 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 6 7 8 5 PRESET 9 0 A B C D E TIME PROG TAPE EDIT +I0 MODE REPEAT REC/PAUSE TAPE 1/2 TEST LEVEL To stop the sleep timer operation RANDOM OPEN/CLOSE TUNER DISC SKIP CENTER/REAR /DELAY While the SLEEP indicator is being illuminated, press the SLEEP button repeatedly until the desired time appears. 5 PLAY FLAT MUSIC STOP PLAY/PAUSE STOP PLAY Press the POWER switch, or press the SLEEP button repeatedly until “OFF SLEEP” appears on the display. (The SLEEP indicator will go out.) TAPE PROGRAM USER POWER SLEEP SLEEP INPUT VOLUME Using the timer and the sleep timer at the same time POWER 1 Prepare timer play. (See page 52 and 53.) * Do not turn the power of this unit off after the timer setting is finished. 2 Press the SLEEP button and set the sleep time. When the sleep timer operation finishes, the timer begins functioning to turn the source on at the preset time. Note Do not make the timer time setting so that the timer will start during sleep timer operation. (Since sleep timer operation has priority, the timer will not operate.) E-55 MAINTENANCE Internal care Deck 1 • • Deck 2 Dirty heads, capstans and pinch rollers can cause poor sound and tape jams. Clean these parts with a cotton swab moistened with commercially available head/pinch roller cleaner or isopropyl alcohol, or with a commercially available cleaning tape. After long use, the deck’s heads and capstans may become magnetized, causing poor sound. Demagnetize these parts once every 30 hours of playing/recording time by using a commercially available tape head demagnetizer. Read the demagnetizer’s instructions carefully before use. External care • • Periodically clean the surfaces of this system, especially the top panel of the main unit to prevent the ventilation holes from being blocked with dust etc. Do not use chemically treated cleaning cloths or other chemicals. (See “Precautions”.) TROUBLESHOOTING If your unit fails to operate normally, check the following points to determine whether the fault can be corrected by the simple measures suggested. If it cannot, or if the fault is not listed in the SYMPTOM column, disconnect the power cord and contact your authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for help. AMPLIFIER/TUNER SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY No power even if the POWER switch is pressed. AC supply lead is not plugged in. Plug in the AC supply lead. No sound from one speaker Loose speaker connections. Connect properly. No sound from speakers. Internal protection circuit is functioning. Unplug the AC supply lead from the wall AC outlet, and then plug in again. No sound from the rear speakers. One rear speaker connection is loose or bad. Connect it properly. The sound output level to the rear speakers is set to minimum. Raise the sound output level to the rear speakers. No sound field program is selected. Select the appropriate program. The sound output level to the center speaker is set to minimum. Raise the sound output level to the center speaker. The center channel mode is in PHANTOM mode. Select NORMAL mode. Incorrect sound field program selection. No sound field program is selected. Select the appropriate program. Incorrect cord connections. Connect the cords properly. If the problem persists, the cords may be defective. Input source selection is not proper. Make a proper input source selection. No sound from the center speaker. No sound (or no picture) from an external unit connected with this system. E-56 CAUSE SYMPTOM Excessive static in FM broadcasts. Interference from starting motor of nearby car. AMPLIFIER/TUNER Interference from thermostat of nearby electrical appliance. REMEDY Position the FM antenna as high and as far away from nearby roads as possible. Connect using a coaxial cable. Noise increases during stereo broadcasts. Antenna input is too weak due to obstructions or excessive distance from broadcasting station. Check antenna connections. Stereo broadcasts are noisy and STEREO indicator blinks on and off. Insufficient antenna input. Install an antenna appropriate for the electric field strength of your area. Cannot select preset stations. Preset memory has been erased. Reprogram memory presets. Buzzing or static during AM (LW or MW) broadcasts. Interference from source such as lightning, flourescent lights, electric motors or thermostat of nearby electrical appliance. Problem is difficult to eliminate but can be lessened by grounding MW/LW (AM) loop antenna. TV or microprocessor is being used nearby. Move away from TV or microprocessor. Radio signal is weak or antenna is not properly connected. Properly connect MW/LW (AM) loop antenna. AM (LW or MW) broadcast sensitivity is poor. Install a multi-element type FM antenna if possible. Change orientation of MW/LW (AM) loop antenna. CD PLAYER Install an external MW/LW (AM) antenna. Can’t set timer. Current time is not set. Set current time. This unit will not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (lightning, excessive static electricity, etc.) or power supply with low voltage. Unplug the AC supply lead from the wall AC outlet, and then plug in again after about one minute. Playback will not begin even if disc is loaded. Disc is upside down. Load disc label side up. Disc is dirty. Clean disc. No sound. Input selector setting is incorrect. Press the CD input selector button. Sound stops suddenly (always at same spot). Disc is dirty. Clean disc. Volume is set too high. Lower volume. Tape won’t move during playback or recording. Slack tape wrapped around pinch roller. Take up slack with a pencil before using. Can’t record. Erasure prevention tab is broken off. Replace tape or cover erasure prevention hole with cellophane tape. Head is dirty. Clean heads. Head is dirty. Clean heads. Head has become magnetized. Demagnetize heads with head eraser. Tape is worn. Replace tape. Poor sound quality. Tape encoded with Dolby NR is played back with this unit’s Dolby NR system off. Press the Dolby NR button to turn it on. Stereo balance is poor. Head is dirty. Clean heads. Excessive noise. Head is dirty. Clean heads. Head has become magnetized. Demagnetize heads with head eraser. Tape is worn. Replace tape. Slack tape coming out of cassette shell. Take up slack by turning reels with a pencil. Tape is creased or torn. Replace with new tape. Endless tape is being used. Don’t use endless tapes. Silent gaps between selections are too short. The function of searching for the beginning of desired selections won’t operate unless the silent gaps between selections are at least four seconds long. TAPE DECK Sound is distorted or fades out. Tape travel stops in middle of playback or recording. Can’t find the beginning of desired selections on tape. Excessively soft passages in middle of selections. REMOTE CONTROL Conversation etc. is recorded. Remote control doesn’t work. TV functions strangely when the remote control is used. Batteries are dead. Replace batteries. Remote control is too far away or is being used at incorrect angle. Use within 6 m and 60° radius. Direct sunlight or lighting (of an inverter type of flourescent lamp etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of the main unit. Change position of the main unit. Remote control is being used near TV set with a remote control sensor. Relocate this unit away from the TV or cover TV’s remote control sensor. E-57 English TROUBLESHOOTING SPECIFICATIONS As a part of policy of continuous improvement, YAMAHA reserves the right to make design and specification changes for product improvement without prior notice. The performance specification figures indicated are nominal values of production units. ■ Amplifier section ■ Tuner section Minimum RMS Output Power per Channel Front L, R 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1% THD ............................................. 65W+65W 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 10% THD [U.S.A., Canada, China, Singapore and General models only] ...................................... 75W+75W Center 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1% THD ....................................................... 20W Rear 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1% THD ....................................................... 20W DIN Standard Output Power per Channel [Europe model only] 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1% THD .......................................................... 65W IEC Power [Europe model only] 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 0.1% THD ....................................................... 50W Input Sensitivity/Impedance MD/AUX ............................................................ 300 mV/23 k-ohms Mic Input Sensitivity/Impedance MIC ................................................................... 0.5 mV/4.7 k-ohms Headphone Output Impedance.......................................... 68 ohms Total Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) MD/AUX to SP OUT (32.5W/6 ohms)................................... 0.08% Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) MD/AUX (Input Shorted) [U.S.A., Canada, Europe and U.K. models] ..................... 85 dB [Australia, China, Singapore and General models] ............................................................................................. 75 dB Graphic Equalizer Characteristics (100 Hz, 350 Hz, 1 kHz, 3.5 kHz, 10 kHz) ........................... ±10 dB Tuning Range FM [U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [U.K., Europe, Australia, China, Singapore and General models]........................................ 87.5 to 108.0 MHz AM (MW) [U.S.A., Canada and General models] ............................................................................ 530 – 1,710 kHz [U.K., Europe, Australia, China and Singapore models] ............................................................................ 531 – 1,611 kHz LW [U.K. and Europe models only] ........................... 153 – 288 kHz Usable Sensitivity FM (75 ohms) (30 dB S/N Quieting, 1 kHz, 100% mod.) [U.S.A., Canada, China, Singapore and General models] ..........................................................................1.5 µV (14.8 dBf) (DIN, Mono, S/N 26 dB) [U.K., Europe and Australia models] .............................1.8 µV AM (MW) .......................................................................... 280 µV/m LW [U.K. and Europe models only]............................... 560 µV/m ■ CD player section Type ................................................. 3 DISC Carousel Auto-changer Signal Readout ........................... Non-contact, 3-beam semi-conductor laser pick-up D/A Converter ................................................................... 1-bit DAC Filter ................................................8-time oversampling digital filter Wow and Flutter .........................................Below measurable limits ■ Video section Video Signal Level .................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 ohms Maximum Input Level ............................................ 1.5 Vp-p or more Signal-to-Noise Ratio ................................................ 50 dB or more Monitor Out Frequency Response ..............5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB ■ Tape deck section Type ............................. Auto Reverse stereo double Cassette Deck Deck 1: Playback only Deck 2: Playback/Recording Heads ................................................ PB, REC/PB : Hard Permalloy Erase : Double Gap Ferrite Motors ................................................................ DC servo motor x 2 Wow and Flutter ................................................. 50.19%, W.PEAK 0.09%, W.RMS Fast Winding Time (C-60 Tape) ........................ About 110 seconds Frequency Response (–20 dB) Type l (Normal)........................................... 30 – 15,000 Hz 53 dB Type ll (High) .............................................. 30 – 16,000 Hz 53 dB Signal-to-Noise Ratio .................................. 58 dB (Dolby NR OFF) 66 dB (Dolby B NR ON) Harmonic Distortion .......................................... No more than 0.8% Channel Separation (Input Shorted 1 kHz) ................................................................................. More than 40 dB Crosstalk (Input Shorted 125 Hz).......................... More than 55 dB E-58 ■ Speaker section ■ General Type Front .................. 3-Way Active Servo Processing Speaker System (Magnetic-Shielding Type) Center ................................................. Full Range Speaker System (Magnetic-Shielding Type) Rear .................................................... Full Range Speaker System Speakers Front.............................................................. 13 cm (5-1/8”) woofer 5 cm (1-15/16”) tweeter 2 cm (13/16”) super tweeter Center.......................................... 9 cm (3-9/16”) full range speaker Rear ............................................... 8 cm (3-1/8”) full range speaker Frequency Range Front........................................................................ 60 – 20,000 Hz Center ................................................................... 100 – 20,000 Hz Rear....................................................................... 110 – 20,000 Hz Sound Pressure Level Front.................................................................................... 87.0 dB Center ................................................................................. 85.0 dB Rear..................................................................................... 85.0 dB Maximum Power Handling Capacity Front......................................................................................... 90W Center ...................................................................................... 27W Rear....................................................................................... 13.5W Impedance Front .................................................................................... 6 ohms Center .................................................................................. 8 ohms Rear ..................................................................................... 4 ohms Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120V, 60 Hz [U.K., Europe and Singapore models] ............... AC 230V, 50 Hz [Australia model] ................................................. AC 240V, 50 Hz [China model] ...................................................... AC 220V, 50 Hz [General model] ......................... AC 110/120/220/240V, 60/50 Hz Power consumption ............................................................... 190W Dimensions (W x H x D) GX-70 ............................................................. 280 x 320 x 360 mm (11” x 12-5/8” x 14-3/16”) NX-GX70 ........................................................ 200 x 320 x 243 mm (7-7/8” x 12-5/8” x 9-9/16”) NX-C70 ........................................................... 280 x 123 x 140 mm (11” x 4-13/16” x 5-1/2”) NX-E70 ........................................................... 200 x 115 x 105 mm (7-7/8” x 4-1/2” x 4-1/8”) Weight GX-70 ......................................................... 10.8 kg (23 lbs. 12 oz.) NX-GX70 .................................................. 3.5 kg (7 lbs. 11 oz.) x 2 NX-C70 ............................................................. 1.5 kg (3 lbs. 5 oz.) NX-E70 ..................................................... 0.8 kg (1 lbs. 12 oz.) x 2 E-59 English SPECIFICATIONS YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA Printed in Malaysia VV18180-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
Yamaha GX-700RDS Manual de usuario
- Categoría
- Reproductores de CD
- Tipo
- Manual de usuario
en otros idiomas
- français: Yamaha GX-700RDS Manuel utilisateur
- italiano: Yamaha GX-700RDS Manuale utente
- English: Yamaha GX-700RDS User manual
- Deutsch: Yamaha GX-700RDS Benutzerhandbuch
- русский: Yamaha GX-700RDS Руководство пользователя
- Nederlands: Yamaha GX-700RDS Handleiding
- português: Yamaha GX-700RDS Manual do usuário
- dansk: Yamaha GX-700RDS Brugermanual
- polski: Yamaha GX-700RDS Instrukcja obsługi
- čeština: Yamaha GX-700RDS Uživatelský manuál
- svenska: Yamaha GX-700RDS Användarmanual
- Türkçe: Yamaha GX-700RDS Kullanım kılavuzu
- suomi: Yamaha GX-700RDS Ohjekirja
- română: Yamaha GX-700RDS Manual de utilizare
Artículos relacionados
-
Yamaha GX-50RDS El manual del propietario
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Otros documentos
-
Memorex DB3061-CAROM Guia de referencia
-
Aiwa CA-DW635 Manual de usuario
-
Sonus LBT-XG100AV Manual de usuario
-
Audiovox CE520 Operating Instructions Manual
-
-
-
-
-
NAD L40 El manual del propietario
-
Sony CMT-L1 Manual de usuario
